ld/
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set I960
28 @set M68HC11
29 @set M68K
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set POWERPC
33 @set POWERPC64
34 @set Renesas
35 @set SPU
36 @set TICOFF
37 @set WIN32
38 @set XTENSA
39 @end ifset
40 @c man end
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @format
44 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 @end format
48 @end ifinfo
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
96 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68HC11
148 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset SPU
160 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset TICOFF
163 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset WIN32
166 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset XTENSA
169 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170 @end ifset
171 @end ifclear
172 @ifclear SingleFormat
173 * BFD:: BFD
174 @end ifclear
175 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
179 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
180 * LD Index:: LD Index
181 @end menu
182 @end ifnottex
183
184 @node Overview
185 @chapter Overview
186
187 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188 @cindex what is this?
189
190 @ifset man
191 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
192 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193 @c man end
194
195 @c man begin SEEALSO
196 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198 @file{ld}.
199 @c man end
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212 @ifset man
213 @c For the man only
214 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217 @end ifset
218
219 @ifclear SingleFormat
220 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225 @end ifclear
226
227 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233 @c man end
234
235 @node Invocation
236 @chapter Invocation
237
238 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242 you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244 @c man end
245
246 @ifset UsesEnvVars
247 @menu
248 * Options:: Command Line Options
249 * Environment:: Environment Variables
250 @end menu
251
252 @node Options
253 @section Command Line Options
254 @end ifset
255
256 @cindex command line
257 @cindex options
258
259 @c man begin OPTIONS
260
261 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263 @cindex standard Unix system
264 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266 link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268 @smallexample
269 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270 @end smallexample
271
272 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285 noted in the descriptions below.
286
287 @cindex object files
288 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291 an option and its argument.
292
293 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297 message @samp{No input files}.
298
299 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
310
311 For options whose names are a single letter,
312 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314 option that requires them.
315
316 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
319 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
321 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323 output.
324
325 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330 accepted.
331
332 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335 compiler driver) like this:
336
337 @smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339 @end smallexample
340
341 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349 @smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351 @end smallexample
352
353 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354 linker:
355
356 @table @gcctabopt
357 @include at-file.texi
358
359 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
360 @item -a @var{keyword}
361 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376 interface.
377
378 @ifset I960
379 @cindex architectures
380 @kindex -A @var{arch}
381 @item -A @var{architecture}
382 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
384 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
386 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
388 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
389 family}, for details.
390
391 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
392 other architecture families.
393 @end ifset
394
395 @ifclear SingleFormat
396 @cindex binary input format
397 @kindex -b @var{format}
398 @kindex --format=@var{format}
399 @cindex input format
400 @cindex input format
401 @item -b @var{input-format}
402 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
403 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
405 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
406 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
407 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
408 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
409 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413 @xref{BFD}.
414
415 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417 linking object files of different formats), by including
418 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
419 particular format.
420
421 The default format is taken from the environment variable
422 @code{GNUTARGET}.
423 @ifset UsesEnvVars
424 @xref{Environment}.
425 @end ifset
426 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
427 @code{TARGET};
428 @ifclear man
429 see @ref{Format Commands}.
430 @end ifclear
431 @end ifclear
432
433 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @cindex compatibility, MRI
436 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
438 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
439 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
440 @ifclear man
441 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442 @end ifclear
443 @ifset man
444 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445 @end ifset
446 Introduce MRI script files with
447 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
448 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
450 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452 @cindex common allocation
453 @kindex -d
454 @kindex -dc
455 @kindex -dp
456 @item -d
457 @itemx -dc
458 @itemx -dp
459 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
465 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
476 @cindex entry point, from command line
477 @kindex -e @var{entry}
478 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
479 @item -e @var{entry}
480 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
489 @kindex --exclude-libs
490 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
492 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
493 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498 be treated as hidden.
499
500 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511 regardless of this option.
512
513 @cindex dynamic symbol table
514 @kindex -E
515 @kindex --export-dynamic
516 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
517 @item -E
518 @itemx --export-dynamic
519 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
520 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
529
530 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533 linking the program itself.
534
535 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
536 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
537 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
538
539 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
543 @ifclear SingleFormat
544 @cindex big-endian objects
545 @cindex endianness
546 @kindex -EB
547 @item -EB
548 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550 @cindex little-endian objects
551 @kindex -EL
552 @item -EL
553 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
554 @end ifclear
555
556 @kindex -f @var{name}
557 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558 @item -f @var{name}
559 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573 machine specific performance.
574
575 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
578 @kindex -F @var{name}
579 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
580 @item -F @var{name}
581 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
582 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593 @var{name}.
594
595 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
596 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
597 object files.
598 @ifclear SingleFormat
599 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
600 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
601 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
602 environment variable.
603 @end ifclear
604 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605 creating an ELF shared object.
606
607 @cindex finalization function
608 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
609 @item -fini=@var{name}
610 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613 the function to call.
614
615 @kindex -g
616 @item -g
617 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
619 @kindex -G @var{value}
620 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
621 @cindex object size
622 @item -G @var{value}
623 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629 @cindex runtime library name
630 @kindex -h @var{name}
631 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
632 @item -h @var{name}
633 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640 @kindex -i
641 @cindex incremental link
642 @item -i
643 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
645 @cindex initialization function
646 @kindex -init=@var{name}
647 @item -init=@var{name}
648 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651 function to call.
652
653 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
654 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
655 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
656 @item -l @var{namespec}
657 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
661 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
662 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
663
664 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
665 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671 @var{filename}.
672
673 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
680 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
681 archives multiple times.
682
683 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685 @ifset GENERIC
686 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
687 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
688 behaviour of the AIX linker.
689 @end ifset
690
691 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
692 @kindex -L @var{dir}
693 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
694 @item -L @var{searchdir}
695 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
696 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
698 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
701 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
702 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704 option is specified.
705
706 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
709 @ifset UsesEnvVars
710 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
711 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
712 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713 @end ifset
714
715 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719 @cindex emulation
720 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
721 @item -m @var{emulation}
722 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729 configured.
730
731 @cindex link map
732 @kindex -M
733 @kindex --print-map
734 @item -M
735 @itemx --print-map
736 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737 information about the link, including the following:
738
739 @itemize @bullet
740 @item
741 Where object files are mapped into memory.
742 @item
743 How common symbols are allocated.
744 @item
745 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
747 @item
748 The values assigned to symbols.
749
750 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756 linker script containing:
757
758 @smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762 @end smallexample
763
764 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765 option is used:
766
767 @smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771 @end smallexample
772
773 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774 scripts.
775 @end itemize
776
777 @kindex -n
778 @cindex read-only text
779 @cindex NMAGIC
780 @kindex --nmagic
781 @item -n
782 @itemx --nmagic
783 Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
784 @code{NMAGIC} if possible.
785
786 @kindex -N
787 @kindex --omagic
788 @cindex read/write from cmd line
789 @cindex OMAGIC
790 @item -N
791 @itemx --omagic
792 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
793 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
794 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
795 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
796 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
797 specification published by Microsoft.
798
799 @kindex --no-omagic
800 @cindex OMAGIC
801 @item --no-omagic
802 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
803 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
804 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
805 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
806
807 @kindex -o @var{output}
808 @kindex --output=@var{output}
809 @cindex naming the output file
810 @item -o @var{output}
811 @itemx --output=@var{output}
812 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
813 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
814 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
815
816 @kindex -O @var{level}
817 @cindex generating optimized output
818 @item -O @var{level}
819 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
820 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
821 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
822 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
823 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
824 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
825 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
826
827 @kindex -q
828 @kindex --emit-relocs
829 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
830 @item -q
831 @itemx --emit-relocs
832 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
833 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
834 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
835 in larger executables.
836
837 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
838
839 @kindex --force-dynamic
840 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
841 @item --force-dynamic
842 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
843 to VxWorks targets.
844
845 @cindex partial link
846 @cindex relocatable output
847 @kindex -r
848 @kindex --relocatable
849 @item -r
850 @itemx --relocatable
851 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
852 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
853 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
854 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
855 @code{OMAGIC}.
856 @c ; see @option{-N}.
857 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
858 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
859 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
860
861 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
862 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
863 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
864 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
865 with input files in other formats at all.
866
867 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
868
869 @kindex -R @var{file}
870 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
871 @cindex symbol-only input
872 @item -R @var{filename}
873 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
874 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
875 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
876 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
877 programs. You may use this option more than once.
878
879 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
880 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
881 the @option{-rpath} option.
882
883 @kindex -s
884 @kindex --strip-all
885 @cindex strip all symbols
886 @item -s
887 @itemx --strip-all
888 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
889
890 @kindex -S
891 @kindex --strip-debug
892 @cindex strip debugger symbols
893 @item -S
894 @itemx --strip-debug
895 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
896
897 @kindex -t
898 @kindex --trace
899 @cindex input files, displaying
900 @item -t
901 @itemx --trace
902 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
903
904 @kindex -T @var{script}
905 @kindex --script=@var{script}
906 @cindex script files
907 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
908 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
909 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
910 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
911 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
912 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
913 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
914 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
915 options accumulate.
916
917 @kindex -dT @var{script}
918 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
919 @cindex script files
920 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
921 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
922 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
923
924 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
925 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
926 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
927 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
928 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
929 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
930 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
931 @samp{gcc}).
932
933 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
934 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
935 @cindex undefined symbol
936 @item -u @var{symbol}
937 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
938 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
939 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
940 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
941 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
942 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
943
944 @kindex -Ur
945 @cindex constructors
946 @item -Ur
947 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
948 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
949 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
950 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
951 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
952 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
953 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
954 @samp{-r} for the others.
955
956 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
957 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
959 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
960 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
961 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
962 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
963 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
964 in a linker script.
965
966 @kindex -v
967 @kindex -V
968 @kindex --version
969 @cindex version
970 @item -v
971 @itemx --version
972 @itemx -V
973 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
974 lists the supported emulations.
975
976 @kindex -x
977 @kindex --discard-all
978 @cindex deleting local symbols
979 @item -x
980 @itemx --discard-all
981 Delete all local symbols.
982
983 @kindex -X
984 @kindex --discard-locals
985 @cindex local symbols, deleting
986 @item -X
987 @itemx --discard-locals
988 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
989 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
990 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
991
992 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
993 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994 @cindex symbol tracing
995 @item -y @var{symbol}
996 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
998 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
999 to prepend an underscore.
1000
1001 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1002 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1003
1004 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1005 @item -Y @var{path}
1006 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1007 for Solaris compatibility.
1008
1009 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1010 @item -z @var{keyword}
1011 The recognized keywords are:
1012 @table @samp
1013
1014 @item combreloc
1015 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1016 lookup caching possible.
1017
1018 @item defs
1019 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1020 shared libraries are still allowed.
1021
1022 @item execstack
1023 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1024
1025 @item initfirst
1026 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1027 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1028 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1029 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1030 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1031 objects.
1032
1033 @item interpose
1034 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1035 but the primary executable.
1036
1037 @item lazy
1038 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1039 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1040 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1041 Lazy binding is the default.
1042
1043 @item loadfltr
1044 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1045 runtime.
1046
1047 @item muldefs
1048 Allows multiple definitions.
1049
1050 @item nocombreloc
1051 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1052
1053 @item nocopyreloc
1054 Disables production of copy relocs.
1055
1056 @item nodefaultlib
1057 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1058 ignore any default library search paths.
1059
1060 @item nodelete
1061 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1062
1063 @item nodlopen
1064 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1065
1066 @item nodump
1067 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1068
1069 @item noexecstack
1070 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1071
1072 @item norelro
1073 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1074
1075 @item now
1076 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1077 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1078 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1079 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1080 first called.
1081
1082 @item origin
1083 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1084
1085 @item relro
1086 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1087
1088 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1089 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1090
1091 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1092 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1093
1094 @end table
1095
1096 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1097
1098 @kindex -(
1099 @cindex groups of archives
1100 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1101 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1102 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1103 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1104
1105 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1106 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1107 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1108 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1109 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1110 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1111 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1112 resolved.
1113
1114 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1115 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1116 more archives.
1117
1118 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1119 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1120 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1123 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1124 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1125 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1126 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1127 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1128 restore the old behaviour.
1129
1130 @kindex --as-needed
1131 @kindex --no-as-needed
1132 @item --as-needed
1133 @itemx --no-as-needed
1134 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1135 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1136 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1137 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1138 needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1139 for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1140 which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1141 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1142 linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
1143 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1144
1145 @kindex --add-needed
1146 @kindex --no-add-needed
1147 @item --add-needed
1148 @itemx --no-add-needed
1149 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1150 DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1151 the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1152 a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1153 @option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1154 for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1155 the default behaviour.
1156
1157 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1158 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1159 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1160
1161 @kindex -Bdynamic
1162 @kindex -dy
1163 @kindex -call_shared
1164 @item -Bdynamic
1165 @itemx -dy
1166 @itemx -call_shared
1167 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1168 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1169 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1170 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1171 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1172 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1173
1174 @kindex -Bgroup
1175 @item -Bgroup
1176 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1177 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1178 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1179 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1180 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1181
1182 @kindex -Bstatic
1183 @kindex -dn
1184 @kindex -non_shared
1185 @kindex -static
1186 @item -Bstatic
1187 @itemx -dn
1188 @itemx -non_shared
1189 @itemx -static
1190 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1191 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1192 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1193 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1194 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1195 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1196 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1197 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1198 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1199 libraries.
1200
1201 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1202 @item -Bsymbolic
1203 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1204 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1205 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1206 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1207 platforms which support shared libraries.
1208
1209 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1210 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1211 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1212 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1213 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1214 libraries.
1215
1216 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1218 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1219 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1220 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1221 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1222 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1223 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1224 which support shared libraries.
1225
1226 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1227 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1228
1229 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1230 @item --dynamic-list-data
1231 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1232
1233 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1235 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1236 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1237
1238 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1240 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1241
1242 @kindex --check-sections
1243 @kindex --no-check-sections
1244 @item --check-sections
1245 @itemx --no-check-sections
1246 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1247 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1248 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1249 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1250 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1251 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1252 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1253 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1254 option.
1255
1256 @cindex cross reference table
1257 @kindex --cref
1258 @item --cref
1259 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1260 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1261 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1262
1263 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1264 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1265 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1266 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1267 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1268
1269 @cindex common allocation
1270 @kindex --no-define-common
1271 @item --no-define-common
1272 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1273 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1274 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1275
1276 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1277 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1278 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1279 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1280 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1281 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1282 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1283 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1284 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1285 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1286
1287 @cindex symbols, from command line
1288 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1289 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1290 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1291 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1292 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1293 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1294 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1295 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1296 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1297 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1298 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1299 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1300 @var{expression}.
1301
1302 @cindex demangling, from command line
1303 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1304 @kindex --no-demangle
1305 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1306 @itemx --no-demangle
1307 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1308 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1309 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1310 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1311 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1312 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1313 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1314 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1315 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1316
1317 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1318 @kindex -I@var{file}
1319 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1320 @item -I@var{file}
1321 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1322 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1323 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1324 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1325 doing.
1326
1327 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1328 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1329 @item --fatal-warnings
1330 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1331 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1332 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1333
1334 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1335 @item --force-exe-suffix
1336 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1337
1338 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1339 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1340 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1341 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1342 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1343 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1344
1345 @kindex --gc-sections
1346 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1347 @cindex garbage collection
1348 @item --gc-sections
1349 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1350 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1351 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1352 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1353 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1354
1355 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1356 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1357 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1358 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1359 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1360 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1361 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1362 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1363 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1364
1365 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1366 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1367 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1368 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1369
1370 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1371 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1372 @cindex garbage collection
1373 @item --print-gc-sections
1374 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1375 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1376 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1377 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1378 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1379 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1380 line.
1381
1382 @cindex help
1383 @cindex usage
1384 @kindex --help
1385 @item --help
1386 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1387
1388 @kindex --target-help
1389 @item --target-help
1390 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1391
1392 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1393 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1394 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1395 @option{-M} option, above.
1396
1397 @cindex memory usage
1398 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1399 @item --no-keep-memory
1400 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1401 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1402 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1403 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1404 while linking a large executable.
1405
1406 @kindex --no-undefined
1407 @kindex -z defs
1408 @item --no-undefined
1409 @itemx -z defs
1410 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1411 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1412 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1413 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1414 libraries being linked in.
1415
1416 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1417 @kindex -z muldefs
1418 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1419 @itemx -z muldefs
1420 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1421 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1422 first definition will be used.
1423
1424 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1425 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1426 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1427 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1428 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1429 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1430 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1431 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1432 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1433
1434 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1435 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1436 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1437 a shared library.
1438
1439 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1440 libraries specified at link time are that:
1441
1442 @itemize @bullet
1443 @item
1444 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1445 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1446 resolvable at load time.
1447 @item
1448 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1449 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1450
1451 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1452 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1453 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1454 appropriate memset function.
1455 @end itemize
1456
1457 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1458 @item --no-undefined-version
1459 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1460 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1461 will be issued instead.
1462
1463 @kindex --default-symver
1464 @item --default-symver
1465 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1466 exported symbols.
1467
1468 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1469 @item --default-imported-symver
1470 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1471 imported symbols.
1472
1473 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1474 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1475 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1476 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1477 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1478 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1479 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1480 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1481 inappropriate.
1482
1483 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1484 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1485 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1486 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1487
1488 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1489 @item --no-whole-archive
1490 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1491 archive files.
1492
1493 @cindex output file after errors
1494 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1495 @item --noinhibit-exec
1496 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1497 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1498 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1499 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1500
1501 @kindex -nostdlib
1502 @item -nostdlib
1503 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1504 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1505 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1506
1507 @ifclear SingleFormat
1508 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1509 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1510 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1511 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1512 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1513 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1514 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1515 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1516 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1517 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1518 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1519 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1520 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1521 @end ifclear
1522
1523 @kindex -pie
1524 @kindex --pic-executable
1525 @item -pie
1526 @itemx --pic-executable
1527 @cindex position independent executables
1528 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1529 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1530 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1531 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1532 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1533 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1534
1535 @kindex -qmagic
1536 @item -qmagic
1537 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1538
1539 @kindex -Qy
1540 @item -Qy
1541 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1542
1543 @kindex --relax
1544 @cindex synthesizing linker
1545 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1546 @item --relax
1547 An option with machine dependent effects.
1548 @ifset GENERIC
1549 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1550 @end ifset
1551 @ifset H8300
1552 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1553 @end ifset
1554 @ifset I960
1555 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1556 @end ifset
1557 @ifset XTENSA
1558 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1559 @end ifset
1560 @ifset M68HC11
1561 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1562 @end ifset
1563 @ifset POWERPC
1564 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1565 @end ifset
1566
1567 On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1568 optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1569 in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1570 instructions in the output object file.
1571
1572 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1573 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1574 @ifset GENERIC
1575 This is known to be
1576 the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1577 @end ifset
1578
1579 @ifset GENERIC
1580 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1581 but ignored.
1582 @end ifset
1583
1584 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1585 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1586 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1587 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1588 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1589 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1590 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1591 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1592 @ifset GENERIC
1593 (such as VxWorks)
1594 @end ifset
1595 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1596 run-time memory.
1597
1598 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1599 or symbols needed for relocations.
1600
1601 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1602 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1603
1604 @ifset GENERIC
1605 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1606 @cindex runtime library search path
1607 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1608 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1609 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1610 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1611 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1612 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1613 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1614 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1615 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1616 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1617
1618 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1619 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1620 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1621 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1622 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1623 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1624 file systems.
1625
1626 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1627 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1628 the @option{-rpath} option.
1629 @end ifset
1630
1631 @ifset GENERIC
1632 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1633 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1634 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1635 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1636 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1637 of the input files.
1638
1639 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1640 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1641 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1642 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1643 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1644 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1645 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1646 appearing multiple times.
1647
1648 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1649 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1650 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1651 runtime linker would do.
1652
1653 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1654 libraries:
1655 @enumerate
1656 @item
1657 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1658 @item
1659 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1660 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1661 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1662 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1663 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1664 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1665 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1666 @item
1667 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1668 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1669 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1670 @item
1671 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1672 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1673 @item
1674 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1675 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1676 @item
1677 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1678 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1679 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1680 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1681 @item
1682 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1683 @item
1684 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1685 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1686 @end enumerate
1687
1688 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1689 warning and continue with the link.
1690 @end ifset
1691
1692 @kindex -shared
1693 @kindex -Bshareable
1694 @item -shared
1695 @itemx -Bshareable
1696 @cindex shared libraries
1697 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1698 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1699 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1700 undefined symbols in the link.
1701
1702 @kindex --sort-common
1703 @item --sort-common
1704 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1705 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1706 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1707 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1708 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1709 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1710 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1711 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1712
1713 @kindex --sort-section=name
1714 @item --sort-section=name
1715 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1716 patterns in the linker script.
1717
1718 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1719 @item --sort-section=alignment
1720 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1721 patterns in the linker script.
1722
1723 @kindex --split-by-file
1724 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1725 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1726 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1727 size of 1 if not given.
1728
1729 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1730 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1731 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1732 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1733 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1734 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1735 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1736 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1737 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1738 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1739 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1740 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1741
1742 @kindex --stats
1743 @item --stats
1744 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1745 as execution time and memory usage.
1746
1747 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1748 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1749 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1750 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1751 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1752
1753 @kindex --traditional-format
1754 @cindex traditional format
1755 @item --traditional-format
1756 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1757 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1758 use the traditional format instead.
1759
1760 @cindex dbx
1761 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1762 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1763 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1764 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1765 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1766 combine duplicate entries.
1767
1768 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1769 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1770 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1771 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1772 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1773 line.
1774 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1775 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1776 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1777 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1778 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1779
1780 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1781 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1782 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1783 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1784 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1785 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1786 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1787 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1788 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1789
1790 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1791 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1792 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1793 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1794 of the first byte of the text segment.
1795
1796 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1797 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1798 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1799 values for @samp{method}:
1800
1801 @table @samp
1802 @item ignore-all
1803 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1804
1805 @item report-all
1806 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1807
1808 @item ignore-in-object-files
1809 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1810 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1811
1812 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1813 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1814 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1815 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1816 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1817 command line.
1818 @end table
1819
1820 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1821 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1822
1823 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1824 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1825 can change this to a warning.
1826
1827 @kindex --verbose
1828 @cindex verbose
1829 @item --dll-verbose
1830 @itemx --verbose
1831 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1832 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1833 the linker script being used by the linker.
1834
1835 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1836 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1837 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1838 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1839 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1840 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1841 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1842 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1843 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1844 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1845 @xref{WIN32}.
1846
1847 @kindex --warn-common
1848 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1849 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1850 @item --warn-common
1851 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1852 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1853 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1854 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1855 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1856 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1857
1858 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1859
1860 @table @samp
1861 @item int i = 1;
1862 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1863 file.
1864
1865 @item extern int i;
1866 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1867 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1868 variable somewhere.
1869
1870 @item int i;
1871 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1872 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1873 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1874 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1875 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1876 a definition of the same variable.
1877 @end table
1878
1879 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1880 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1881 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1882 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1883 a common symbol.
1884
1885 @enumerate
1886 @item
1887 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1888 definition for the symbol.
1889 @smallexample
1890 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1891 overridden by definition
1892 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1893 @end smallexample
1894
1895 @item
1896 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1897 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1898 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1899 @smallexample
1900 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1901 overriding common
1902 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1903 @end smallexample
1904
1905 @item
1906 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1907 @smallexample
1908 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1909 of `@var{symbol}'
1910 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1911 @end smallexample
1912
1913 @item
1914 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1915 @smallexample
1916 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1917 overridden by larger common
1918 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1919 @end smallexample
1920
1921 @item
1922 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1923 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1924 encountered in a different order.
1925 @smallexample
1926 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1927 overriding smaller common
1928 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1929 @end smallexample
1930 @end enumerate
1931
1932 @kindex --warn-constructors
1933 @item --warn-constructors
1934 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1935 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1936 detect the use of global constructors.
1937
1938 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1939 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1940 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1941 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1942 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1943 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1944 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1945 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1946 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1947 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1948 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1949 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1950 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1951
1952 @kindex --warn-once
1953 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1954 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1955 @item --warn-once
1956 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1957 which refers to it.
1958
1959 @kindex --warn-section-align
1960 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1961 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1962 @item --warn-section-align
1963 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1964 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1965 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1966 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1967 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1968
1969 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1970 @item --warn-shared-textrel
1971 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1972
1973 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
1974 @item --warn-alternate-em
1975 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1976
1977 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1978 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1979 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1980 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1981 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1982
1983 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1984 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
1985 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1986 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1987
1988 @kindex --whole-archive
1989 @cindex including an entire archive
1990 @item --whole-archive
1991 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1992 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
1993 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1994 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1995 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1996 library. This option may be used more than once.
1997
1998 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1999 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2000 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2001 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2002 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2003
2004 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2005 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2006 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2007 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2008 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2009 @var{symbol}.
2010
2011 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2012 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2013 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2014 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2015
2016 Here is a trivial example:
2017
2018 @smallexample
2019 void *
2020 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2021 @{
2022 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2023 return __real_malloc (c);
2024 @}
2025 @end smallexample
2026
2027 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2028 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2029 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2030 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2031
2032 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2033 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2034 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2035 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2036 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2037
2038 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2039 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2040 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2041 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2042
2043 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2044 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2045 @item --enable-new-dtags
2046 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2047 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2048 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2049 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2050 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2051 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2052 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2053
2054 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2055 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2056 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2057 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2058 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2059 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2060 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2061
2062 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2063 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2064 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2065 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2066 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2067 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2068 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2069
2070 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2071 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2072 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2073 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2074 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2075 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2076
2077 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2078 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2079 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2080 has been used.
2081
2082 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2083 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2084
2085 @kindex --build-id
2086 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2087 @item --build-id
2088 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2089 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2090 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2091 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2092 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2093 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2094 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2095 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2096 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2097 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2098 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2099
2100 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2101 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2102 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2103 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2104 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2105 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2106
2107 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2108 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2109 @end table
2110
2111 @c man end
2112
2113 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2114
2115 @c man begin OPTIONS
2116
2117 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2118 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2119 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2120 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2121 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2122 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2123 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2124 object file).
2125
2126 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2127 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2128 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2129 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2130
2131 @table @gcctabopt
2132
2133 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2134 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2135 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2136 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2137 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2138
2139 @kindex --base-file
2140 @item --base-file @var{file}
2141 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2142 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2143 @file{dlltool}.
2144 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2145
2146 @kindex --dll
2147 @item --dll
2148 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2149 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2150 file.
2151 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2152
2153 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2154 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2155 @item --enable-long-section-names
2156 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2157 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2158 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2159 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2160 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2161 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2162 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2163 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2164 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2165 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2166 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2167 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2168 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2169 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2170 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2171 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2172 image and not stripping symbols.
2173 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2174
2175 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2176 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2177 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2178 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2179 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2180 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2181 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2182 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2183 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2184 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2185 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2186 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2187 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2188 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2189 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2190 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2191 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2192 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2193
2194 @cindex DLLs, creating
2195 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2196 @item --export-all-symbols
2197 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2198 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2199 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2200 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2201 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2202 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2203 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2204 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2205 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2206 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2207 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2208 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2209 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2210 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2211 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2212 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2213 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2214 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2215 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2216 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2217 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2218 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2219 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2220
2221 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2222 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2223 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2224 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2225 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2226
2227 @kindex --file-alignment
2228 @item --file-alignment
2229 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2230 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2231 512.
2232 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2233
2234 @cindex heap size
2235 @kindex --heap
2236 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2237 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2238 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2239 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2240 committed.
2241 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2242
2243 @cindex image base
2244 @kindex --image-base
2245 @item --image-base @var{value}
2246 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2247 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2248 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2249 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2250 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2251 for dlls.
2252 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2253
2254 @kindex --kill-at
2255 @item --kill-at
2256 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2257 symbols before they are exported.
2258 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2259
2260 @kindex --large-address-aware
2261 @item --large-address-aware
2262 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2263 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2264 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2265 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2266 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2267 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2268
2269 @kindex --major-image-version
2270 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2271 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2272 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2273
2274 @kindex --major-os-version
2275 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2276 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2277 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2278
2279 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2280 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2281 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2282 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2283
2284 @kindex --minor-image-version
2285 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2286 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2287 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2288
2289 @kindex --minor-os-version
2290 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2291 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2292 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2293
2294 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2295 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2296 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2297 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2298
2299 @cindex DEF files, creating
2300 @cindex DLLs, creating
2301 @kindex --output-def
2302 @item --output-def @var{file}
2303 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2304 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2305 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2306 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2307 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2308 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2309
2310 @cindex DLLs, creating
2311 @kindex --out-implib
2312 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2313 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2314 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2315 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2316 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2317 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2318 creation step.
2319 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2320
2321 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2322 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2323 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2324 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2325 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2326 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2327 avoided.
2328 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2329
2330 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2331 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2332 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2333 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2334 default.
2335 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2336
2337 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2338 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2339 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2340 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2341 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2342 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2343 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2344 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2345 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2346 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2347
2348 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2349 @item --enable-auto-import
2350 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2351 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2352 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2353 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2354 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2355 specification published by Microsoft.
2356
2357 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2358 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2359 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2360 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2361 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2362
2363 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2364 see this message:
2365
2366 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2367 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2368
2369 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2370 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2371 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2372 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2373 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2374 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2375 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2376 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2377 the warning, and exit.
2378
2379 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2380 data type of the exported variable:
2381
2382 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2383 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2384 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2385
2386 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2387 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2388 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2389 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2390
2391 @example
2392 extern type extern_array[];
2393 extern_array[1] -->
2394 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2395 @end example
2396
2397 or
2398
2399 @example
2400 extern type extern_array[];
2401 extern_array[1] -->
2402 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2403 @end example
2404
2405 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2406 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2407
2408 @example
2409 extern struct s extern_struct;
2410 extern_struct.field -->
2411 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2412 @end example
2413
2414 or
2415
2416 @example
2417 extern long long extern_ll;
2418 extern_ll -->
2419 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2420 @end example
2421
2422 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2423 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2424 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2425 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2426 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2427 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2428 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2429 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2430
2431 Original:
2432 @example
2433 --foo.h
2434 extern int arr[];
2435 --foo.c
2436 #include "foo.h"
2437 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2438 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2439 @}
2440 @end example
2441
2442 Solution 1:
2443 @example
2444 --foo.h
2445 extern int arr[];
2446 --foo.c
2447 #include "foo.h"
2448 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2449 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2450 volatile int *parr = arr;
2451 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2452 @}
2453 @end example
2454
2455 Solution 2:
2456 @example
2457 --foo.h
2458 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2459 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2460 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2461 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2462 #else
2463 #define FOO_IMPORT
2464 #endif
2465 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2466 --foo.c
2467 #include "foo.h"
2468 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2469 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2470 @}
2471 @end example
2472
2473 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2474 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2475 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2476 functions).
2477 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2478
2479 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2480 @item --disable-auto-import
2481 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2482 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2483 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2484
2485 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2486 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2487 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2488 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2489 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2490 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2491 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2492
2493 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2494 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2495 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2496 DLLs. This is the default.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2500 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2501 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2502 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
2504 @kindex --section-alignment
2505 @item --section-alignment
2506 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2507 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2508 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2509
2510 @cindex stack size
2511 @kindex --stack
2512 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2513 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2514 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2515 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2516 committed.
2517 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2518
2519 @kindex --subsystem
2520 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2521 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2522 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2523 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2524 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2525 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2526 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2527 @var{which}.
2528 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2529
2530 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2531 of the PE file header:
2532 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2533
2534 @kindex --dynamicbase
2535 @item --dynamicbase
2536 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2537 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2538 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2539
2540 @kindex --forceinteg
2541 @item --forceinteg
2542 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2543
2544 @kindex --nxcompat
2545 @item --nxcompat
2546 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2547 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2548
2549 @kindex --no-isolation
2550 @item --no-isolation
2551 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2552
2553 @kindex --no-seh
2554 @item --no-seh
2555 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2556 this image.
2557
2558 @kindex --no-bind
2559 @item --no-bind
2560 Do not bind this image.
2561
2562 @kindex --wdmdriver
2563 @item --wdmdriver
2564 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2565
2566 @kindex --tsaware
2567 @item --tsaware
2568 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2569
2570 @end table
2571
2572 @c man end
2573
2574 @ifset M68HC11
2575 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2576
2577 @c man begin OPTIONS
2578
2579 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2580 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2581
2582 @table @gcctabopt
2583
2584 @kindex --no-trampoline
2585 @item --no-trampoline
2586 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2587 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2588 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2589
2590 @kindex --bank-window
2591 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2592 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2593 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2594 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2595 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2596
2597 @end table
2598
2599 @c man end
2600 @end ifset
2601
2602 @ifset M68K
2603 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2604
2605 @c man begin OPTIONS
2606
2607 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2608 when linking for 68K targets.
2609
2610 @table @gcctabopt
2611
2612 @kindex --got
2613 @item --got=@var{type}
2614 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2615 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2616 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2617 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2618
2619 @end table
2620
2621 @c man end
2622 @end ifset
2623
2624 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2625 @node Environment
2626 @section Environment Variables
2627
2628 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2629
2630 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2631 @ifclear SingleFormat
2632 @code{GNUTARGET},
2633 @end ifclear
2634 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2635
2636 @ifclear SingleFormat
2637 @kindex GNUTARGET
2638 @cindex default input format
2639 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2640 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2641 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2642 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2643 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2644 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2645 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2646 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2647 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2648 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2649 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2650 @end ifclear
2651
2652 @kindex LDEMULATION
2653 @cindex default emulation
2654 @cindex emulation, default
2655 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2656 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2657 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2658 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2659 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2660 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2661 linker was configured.
2662
2663 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2664 @cindex demangling, default
2665 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2666 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2667 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2668 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2669 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2670 options.
2671
2672 @c man end
2673 @end ifset
2674
2675 @node Scripts
2676 @chapter Linker Scripts
2677
2678 @cindex scripts
2679 @cindex linker scripts
2680 @cindex command files
2681 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2682 written in the linker command language.
2683
2684 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2685 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2686 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2687 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2688 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2689 described below.
2690
2691 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2692 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2693 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2694 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2695 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2696
2697 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2698 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2699 default linker script.
2700
2701 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2702 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2703 Linker Scripts}.
2704
2705 @menu
2706 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2707 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2708 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2709 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2710 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2711 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2712 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2713 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2714 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2715 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2716 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2717 @end menu
2718
2719 @node Basic Script Concepts
2720 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2721 @cindex linker script concepts
2722 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2723 describe the linker script language.
2724
2725 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2726 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2727 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2728 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2729 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2730 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2731 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2732 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2733
2734 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2735 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2736 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2737 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2738 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2739 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2740 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2741 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2742 of debugging information.
2743
2744 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2745 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2746 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2747 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2748 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2749 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2750 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2751 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2752 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2753 RAM address would be the VMA.
2754
2755 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2756 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2757
2758 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2759 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2760 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2761 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2762 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2763 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2764 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2765
2766 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2767 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2768 option.
2769
2770 @node Script Format
2771 @section Linker Script Format
2772 @cindex linker script format
2773 Linker scripts are text files.
2774
2775 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2776 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2777 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2778 generally ignored.
2779
2780 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2781 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2782 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2783 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2784 file name.
2785
2786 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2787 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2788 to whitespace.
2789
2790 @node Simple Example
2791 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2792 @cindex linker script example
2793 @cindex example of linker script
2794 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2795
2796 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2797 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2798 memory layout of the output file.
2799
2800 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2801 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2802 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2803 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2804 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2805 your input files.
2806
2807 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2808 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2809 linker script which will do that:
2810 @smallexample
2811 SECTIONS
2812 @{
2813 . = 0x10000;
2814 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2815 . = 0x8000000;
2816 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2817 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2818 @}
2819 @end smallexample
2820
2821 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2822 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2823 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2824
2825 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2826 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2827 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2828 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2829 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2830 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2831 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2832
2833 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2834 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2835 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2836 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2837 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2838 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2839
2840 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2841 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2842 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2843
2844 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2845 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2846 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2847 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2848 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2849 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2850 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2851
2852 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2853 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2854 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2855 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2856 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2857 sections.
2858
2859 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2860
2861 @node Simple Commands
2862 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2863 @cindex linker script simple commands
2864 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2865
2866 @menu
2867 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2868 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2869 @ifclear SingleFormat
2870 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2871 @end ifclear
2872
2873 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2874 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2875 @end menu
2876
2877 @node Entry Point
2878 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2879 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2880 @cindex start of execution
2881 @cindex first instruction
2882 @cindex entry point
2883 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2884 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2885 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2886 @smallexample
2887 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2888 @end smallexample
2889
2890 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2891 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2892 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2893 @itemize @bullet
2894 @item
2895 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2896 @item
2897 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2898 @item
2899 the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
2900 @item
2901 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2902 @item
2903 The address @code{0}.
2904 @end itemize
2905
2906 @node File Commands
2907 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2908 @cindex linker script file commands
2909 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2910
2911 @table @code
2912 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2913 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2914 @cindex including a linker script
2915 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2916 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2917 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
2918 10 levels deep.
2919
2920 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2921 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2922
2923 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2924 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2925 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2926 @cindex input files in linker scripts
2927 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
2928 @cindex linker script input object files
2929 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2930 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2931
2932 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2933 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2934 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2935
2936 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2937 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2938
2939 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2940 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2941 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2942 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2943 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2944 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2945 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2946
2947 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
2948 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2949 @samp{-l}.
2950
2951 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2952 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2953 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2954
2955 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2956 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2957 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2958 @cindex grouping input files
2959 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2960 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2961 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2962 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2963
2964 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2965 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2966 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2967 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2968 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2969 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2970 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2971 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2972 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2973 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2974 setting afterwards.
2975
2976 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2977 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2978 @cindex output file name in linker script
2979 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2980 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2981 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2982 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2983 precedence.
2984
2985 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2986 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2987
2988 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2989 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2990 @cindex library search path in linker script
2991 @cindex archive search path in linker script
2992 @cindex search path in linker script
2993 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
2994 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
2995 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2996 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2997 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2998 the command line option are searched first.
2999
3000 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3001 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3002 @cindex first input file
3003 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3004 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3005 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3006 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3007 first file.
3008 @end table
3009
3010 @ifclear SingleFormat
3011 @node Format Commands
3012 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3013 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3014
3015 @table @code
3016 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3017 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3018 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3019 @cindex output file format in linker script
3020 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3021 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3022 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3023 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3024 line option takes precedence.
3025
3026 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3027 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3028 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3029 desired endianness.
3030
3031 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3032 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3033 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3034 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3035
3036 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3037 command:
3038 @smallexample
3039 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3040 @end smallexample
3041 This says that the default format for the output file is
3042 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3043 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3044 format.
3045
3046 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3047 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3048 @cindex input file format in linker script
3049 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3050 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3051 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3052 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3053 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3054 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3055 @end table
3056 @end ifclear
3057
3058 @node REGION_ALIAS
3059 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3060 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3061 @cindex region alias
3062 @cindex region names
3063
3064 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3065 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3066
3067 @smallexample
3068 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3069 @end smallexample
3070
3071 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3072 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3073 to memory regions. An example follows.
3074
3075 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3076 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3077 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3078 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3079 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3080 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3081 sections:
3082
3083 @itemize @bullet
3084 @item
3085 @code{.text} program code;
3086 @item
3087 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3088 @item
3089 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3090 @item
3091 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3092 @end itemize
3093
3094 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3095 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3096 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3097 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3098 @code{C}:
3099 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3100 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3101 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3102 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3103 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3104 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3105 @end multitable
3106 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3107 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3108 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3109 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3110
3111 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3112 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3113 memory layout:
3114 @smallexample
3115 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3116
3117 SECTIONS
3118 @{
3119 .text :
3120 @{
3121 *(.text)
3122 @} > REGION_TEXT
3123 .rodata :
3124 @{
3125 *(.rodata)
3126 rodata_end = .;
3127 @} > REGION_RODATA
3128 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3129 @{
3130 data_start = .;
3131 *(.data)
3132 @} > REGION_DATA
3133 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3134 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3135 .bss :
3136 @{
3137 *(.bss)
3138 @} > REGION_BSS
3139 @}
3140 @end smallexample
3141
3142 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3143 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3144 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3145 @table @code
3146 @item A
3147 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3148 @smallexample
3149 MEMORY
3150 @{
3151 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3152 @}
3153
3154 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3155 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3156 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3157 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3158 @end smallexample
3159 @item B
3160 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3161 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3162 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3163 @smallexample
3164 MEMORY
3165 @{
3166 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3167 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3168 @}
3169
3170 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3171 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3172 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3173 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3174 @end smallexample
3175 @item C
3176 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3177 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3178 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3179 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3180 @smallexample
3181 MEMORY
3182 @{
3183 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3184 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3185 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3186 @}
3187
3188 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3189 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3190 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3191 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3192 @end smallexample
3193 @end table
3194
3195 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3196 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3197 necessary:
3198 @smallexample
3199 #include <string.h>
3200
3201 extern char data_start [];
3202 extern char data_size [];
3203 extern char data_load_start [];
3204
3205 void copy_data(void)
3206 @{
3207 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3208 @{
3209 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3210 @}
3211 @}
3212 @end smallexample
3213
3214 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3215 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3216 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3217
3218 @table @code
3219 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3220 @kindex ASSERT
3221 @cindex assertion in linker script
3222 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3223 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3224
3225 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3226 @kindex EXTERN
3227 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3228 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3229 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3230 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3231 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3232 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3233
3234 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3235 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3236 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3237 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3238 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3239 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3240
3241 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3242 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3243 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3244 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3245 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3246 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3247
3248 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3249 @kindex INSERT
3250 @cindex insert user script into default script
3251 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3252 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3253 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3254 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3255 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3256 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3257 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3258 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3259 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3260 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3261 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3262 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3263 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3264
3265 @smallexample
3266 SECTIONS
3267 @{
3268 OVERLAY :
3269 @{
3270 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3271 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3272 @}
3273 @}
3274 INSERT AFTER .text;
3275 @end smallexample
3276
3277 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3278 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3279 @cindex cross references
3280 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3281 references among certain output sections.
3282
3283 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3284 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3285 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3286 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3287 a function defined in the other section.
3288
3289 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3290 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3291 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3292 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3293 names.
3294
3295 @ifclear SingleFormat
3296 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3297 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3298 @cindex machine architecture
3299 @cindex architecture
3300 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3301 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3302 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3303 the @samp{-f} option.
3304 @end ifclear
3305 @end table
3306
3307 @node Assignments
3308 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3309 @cindex assignment in scripts
3310 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3311 @cindex variables, defining
3312 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3313 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3314
3315 @menu
3316 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3317 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3318 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3319 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3320 @end menu
3321
3322 @node Simple Assignments
3323 @subsection Simple Assignments
3324
3325 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3326
3327 @table @code
3328 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3329 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3330 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3331 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3332 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3333 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3334 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3335 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3336 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3337 @end table
3338
3339 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3340 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3341 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3342
3343 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3344 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3345
3346 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3347
3348 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3349
3350 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3351 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3352 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3353
3354 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3355 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3356
3357 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3358 assignments may be used:
3359
3360 @smallexample
3361 floating_point = 0;
3362 SECTIONS
3363 @{
3364 .text :
3365 @{
3366 *(.text)
3367 _etext = .;
3368 @}
3369 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3370 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3371 @}
3372 @end smallexample
3373 @noindent
3374 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3375 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3376 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3377 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3378 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3379
3380 @node PROVIDE
3381 @subsection PROVIDE
3382 @cindex PROVIDE
3383 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3384 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3385 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3386 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3387 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3388 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3389 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3390 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3391
3392 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3393 @smallexample
3394 SECTIONS
3395 @{
3396 .text :
3397 @{
3398 *(.text)
3399 _etext = .;
3400 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3401 @}
3402 @}
3403 @end smallexample
3404
3405 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3406 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3407 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3408 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3409 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3410 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3411
3412 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3413 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3414 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3415 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3416 hidden and won't be exported.
3417
3418 @node Source Code Reference
3419 @subsection Source Code Reference
3420
3421 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3422 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3423 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3424 symbol that does not have a value.
3425
3426 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3427 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3428 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3429 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3430 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3431 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3432 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3433 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3434
3435 @smallexample
3436 extern int foo;
3437 @end smallexample
3438
3439 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3440
3441 @smallexample
3442 _foo = 1000;
3443 @end smallexample
3444
3445 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3446 transformation has taken place.
3447
3448 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3449 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3450 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3451 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3452 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3453 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3454 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3455
3456 @smallexample
3457 int foo = 1000;
3458 @end smallexample
3459
3460 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3461 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3462 number 1000 is initially stored.
3463
3464 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3465 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3466 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3467 So:
3468
3469 @smallexample
3470 foo = 1;
3471 @end smallexample
3472
3473 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3474 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3475 address. Whereas:
3476
3477 @smallexample
3478 int * a = & foo;
3479 @end smallexample
3480
3481 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3482 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3483 the variable @samp{a}.
3484
3485 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3486 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3487 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3488
3489 @smallexample
3490 foo = 1000;
3491 @end smallexample
3492
3493 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3494 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3495 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3496 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3497 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3498
3499 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3500 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3501 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3502 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3503 linker script contains these declarations:
3504
3505 @smallexample
3506 @group
3507 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3508 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3509 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3510 @end group
3511 @end smallexample
3512
3513 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3514
3515 @smallexample
3516 @group
3517 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3518
3519 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3520 @end group
3521 @end smallexample
3522
3523 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3524
3525 @node SECTIONS
3526 @section SECTIONS Command
3527 @kindex SECTIONS
3528 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3529 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3530
3531 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3532 @smallexample
3533 SECTIONS
3534 @{
3535 @var{sections-command}
3536 @var{sections-command}
3537 @dots{}
3538 @}
3539 @end smallexample
3540
3541 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3542
3543 @itemize @bullet
3544 @item
3545 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3546 @item
3547 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3548 @item
3549 an output section description
3550 @item
3551 an overlay description
3552 @end itemize
3553
3554 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3555 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3556 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3557 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3558 the layout of the output file.
3559
3560 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3561 below.
3562
3563 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3564 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3565 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3566 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3567 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3568 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3569
3570 @menu
3571 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3572 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3573 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3574 * Input Section:: Input section description
3575 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3576 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3577 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3578 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3579 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3580 @end menu
3581
3582 @node Output Section Description
3583 @subsection Output Section Description
3584 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3585 @smallexample
3586 @group
3587 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3588 [AT(@var{lma})]
3589 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3590 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3591 [@var{constraint}]
3592 @{
3593 @var{output-section-command}
3594 @var{output-section-command}
3595 @dots{}
3596 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3597 @end group
3598 @end smallexample
3599
3600 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3601
3602 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3603 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3604 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3605
3606 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3607
3608 @itemize @bullet
3609 @item
3610 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3611 @item
3612 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3613 @item
3614 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3615 @item
3616 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3617 @end itemize
3618
3619 @node Output Section Name
3620 @subsection Output Section Name
3621 @cindex name, section
3622 @cindex section name
3623 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3624 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3625 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3626 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3627 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3628 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3629 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3630 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3631 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3632 commas must be quoted.
3633
3634 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3635 Discarding}.
3636
3637 @node Output Section Address
3638 @subsection Output Section Address
3639 @cindex address, section
3640 @cindex section address
3641 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3642 address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3643 the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3644 based on the current value of the location counter.
3645
3646 If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3647 set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3648 @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3649 current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3650 requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3651 output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3652 within the output section.
3653
3654 For example,
3655 @smallexample
3656 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3657 @end smallexample
3658 @noindent
3659 and
3660 @smallexample
3661 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3662 @end smallexample
3663 @noindent
3664 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3665 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3666 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3667 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3668 section.
3669
3670 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3671 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3672 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3673 do something like this:
3674 @smallexample
3675 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3676 @end smallexample
3677 @noindent
3678 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3679 aligned upward to the specified value.
3680
3681 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3682 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3683 sections are ignored).
3684
3685 @node Input Section
3686 @subsection Input Section Description
3687 @cindex input sections
3688 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3689 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3690
3691 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3692 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3693 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3694 map the input files into your memory layout.
3695
3696 @menu
3697 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3698 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3699 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3700 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3701 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3702 @end menu
3703
3704 @node Input Section Basics
3705 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3706 @cindex input section basics
3707 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3708 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3709
3710 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3711 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3712
3713 The most common input section description is to include all input
3714 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3715 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3716 @smallexample
3717 *(.text)
3718 @end smallexample
3719 @noindent
3720 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3721 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3722 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3723 example:
3724 @smallexample
3725 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3726 @end smallexample
3727 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3728 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3729
3730 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3731 @smallexample
3732 *(.text .rdata)
3733 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3734 @end smallexample
3735 @noindent
3736 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3737 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3738 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3739 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3740 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3741 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3742
3743 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3744 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3745 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3746 @smallexample
3747 data.o(.data)
3748 @end smallexample
3749
3750 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3751 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3752 with no whitespace around the colon.
3753
3754 @table @samp
3755 @item archive:file
3756 matches file within archive
3757 @item archive:
3758 matches the whole archive
3759 @item :file
3760 matches file but not one in an archive
3761 @end table
3762
3763 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3764 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3765 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3766 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3767 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3768 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3769 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3770 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3771 command.
3772
3773 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3774 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3775 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3776 @smallexample
3777 data.o
3778 @end smallexample
3779
3780 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3781 and does not contain any wild card
3782 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3783 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3784 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3785 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3786 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3787 the archive search path.
3788
3789 @node Input Section Wildcards
3790 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3791 @cindex input section wildcards
3792 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3793 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3794 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3795 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3796 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3797
3798 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3799 pattern for the file name.
3800
3801 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3802
3803 @table @samp
3804 @item *
3805 matches any number of characters
3806 @item ?
3807 matches any single character
3808 @item [@var{chars}]
3809 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3810 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3811 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3812 @item \
3813 quotes the following character
3814 @end table
3815
3816 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3817 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3818 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3819 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3820 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3821 a @samp{/} character.
3822
3823 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3824 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3825 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3826
3827 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3828 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3829 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3830 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3831 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3832 @smallexample
3833 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3834 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3835 @end smallexample
3836
3837 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3838 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3839 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3840 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3841 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3842 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3843 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3844
3845 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3846 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3847 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3848 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3849
3850 @cindex SORT
3851 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3852
3853 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3854 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3855
3856 @enumerate
3857 @item
3858 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3859 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3860 sections have the same name.
3861 @item
3862 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3863 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3864 sections have the same alignment.
3865 @item
3866 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3867 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3868 @item
3869 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3870 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3871 @item
3872 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3873 @end enumerate
3874
3875 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3876 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3877 takes precedence over the command line option.
3878
3879 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3880 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3881 treated as nested sorting command.
3882
3883 @enumerate
3884 @item
3885 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3886 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3887 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3888 @item
3889 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3890 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3891 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3892 @end enumerate
3893
3894 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3895 command line option will be ignored.
3896
3897 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3898 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3899 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3900
3901 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3902 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3903 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3904 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3905 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3906 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3907 @smallexample
3908 @group
3909 SECTIONS @{
3910 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3911 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3912 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3913 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3914 @}
3915 @end group
3916 @end smallexample
3917
3918 @node Input Section Common
3919 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
3920 @cindex common symbol placement
3921 @cindex uninitialized data placement
3922 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3923 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3924 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3925 named @samp{COMMON}.
3926
3927 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3928 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3929 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3930 input files are placed in another section.
3931
3932 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3933 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3934 @smallexample
3935 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3936 @end smallexample
3937
3938 @cindex scommon section
3939 @cindex small common symbols
3940 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3941 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3942 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3943 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3944 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3945 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3946 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3947 locations.
3948
3949 @cindex [COMMON]
3950 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3951 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3952 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
3953
3954 @node Input Section Keep
3955 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
3956 @cindex KEEP
3957 @cindex garbage collection
3958 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
3959 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
3960 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3961 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
3962 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
3963
3964 @node Input Section Example
3965 @subsubsection Input Section Example
3966 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3967 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3968 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3969 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3970 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3971 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3972 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3973 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3974 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3975
3976 @smallexample
3977 @group
3978 SECTIONS @{
3979 outputa 0x10000 :
3980 @{
3981 all.o
3982 foo.o (.input1)
3983 @}
3984 @end group
3985 @group
3986 outputb :
3987 @{
3988 foo.o (.input2)
3989 foo1.o (.input1)
3990 @}
3991 @end group
3992 @group
3993 outputc :
3994 @{
3995 *(.input1)
3996 *(.input2)
3997 @}
3998 @}
3999 @end group
4000 @end smallexample
4001
4002 @node Output Section Data
4003 @subsection Output Section Data
4004 @cindex data
4005 @cindex section data
4006 @cindex output section data
4007 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4008 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4009 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4010 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4011 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4012 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4013 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4014 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4015 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4016 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4017 counter.
4018
4019 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4020 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4021 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4022 stored.
4023
4024 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4025 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4026 @smallexample
4027 BYTE(1)
4028 LONG(addr)
4029 @end smallexample
4030
4031 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4032 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4033 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4034 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4035 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4036
4037 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4038 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4039 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4040 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4041 endianness of the first input object file.
4042
4043 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4044 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4045 @smallexample
4046 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4047 @end smallexample
4048 whereas this will work:
4049 @smallexample
4050 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4051 @end smallexample
4052
4053 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4054 @cindex holes, filling
4055 @cindex unspecified memory
4056 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4057 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4058 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4059 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4060 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4061 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4062 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4063 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4064 different parts of an output section.
4065
4066 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4067 value @samp{0x90}:
4068 @smallexample
4069 FILL(0x90909090)
4070 @end smallexample
4071
4072 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4073 section attribute, but it only affects the
4074 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4075 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4076 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4077 expression.
4078
4079 @node Output Section Keywords
4080 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4081 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4082 commands.
4083
4084 @table @code
4085 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4086 @cindex input filename symbols
4087 @cindex filename symbols
4088 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4089 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4090 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4091 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4092 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4093
4094 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4095 normally used for any other object file format.
4096
4097 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4098 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4099 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4100 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4101 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4102 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4103 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4104 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4105 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4106 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4107 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4108 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4109 ignored for other object file formats.
4110
4111 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4112 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4113 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4114 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4115 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4116 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4117 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4118 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4119 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4120 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4121 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4122 @code{exit}.
4123
4124 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4125 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4126 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4127 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4128 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4129 runtime code expects to see.
4130
4131 @smallexample
4132 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4133 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4134 *(.ctors)
4135 LONG(0)
4136 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4137 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4138 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4139 *(.dtors)
4140 LONG(0)
4141 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4142 @end smallexample
4143
4144 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4145 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4146 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4147 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4148 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4149 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4150 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4151 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4152
4153 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4154 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4155 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4156 scripts.
4157
4158 @end table
4159
4160 @node Output Section Discarding
4161 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4162 @cindex discarding sections
4163 @cindex sections, discarding
4164 @cindex removing sections
4165 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4166 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4167 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4168 @smallexample
4169 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4170 @end smallexample
4171 @noindent
4172 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4173 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4174 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4175 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4176
4177 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4178 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4179 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4180 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4181 section is discarded.
4182
4183 @cindex /DISCARD/
4184 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4185 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4186 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4187
4188 @node Output Section Attributes
4189 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4190 @cindex output section attributes
4191 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4192 like this:
4193
4194 @smallexample
4195 @group
4196 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4197 [AT(@var{lma})]
4198 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4199 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4200 [@var{constraint}]
4201 @{
4202 @var{output-section-command}
4203 @var{output-section-command}
4204 @dots{}
4205 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4206 @end group
4207 @end smallexample
4208
4209 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4210 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4211 remaining section attributes.
4212
4213 @menu
4214 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4215 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4216 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4217 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4218 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4219 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4220 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4221 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4222 @end menu
4223
4224 @node Output Section Type
4225 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4226 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4227 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4228
4229 @table @code
4230 @item NOLOAD
4231 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4232 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4233 @item DSECT
4234 @itemx COPY
4235 @itemx INFO
4236 @itemx OVERLAY
4237 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4238 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4239 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4240 section when the program is run.
4241 @end table
4242
4243 @kindex NOLOAD
4244 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4245 @cindex loading, preventing
4246 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4247 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4248 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4249 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4250 need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4251 @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4252 @smallexample
4253 @group
4254 SECTIONS @{
4255 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4256 @dots{}
4257 @}
4258 @end group
4259 @end smallexample
4260
4261 @node Output Section LMA
4262 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4263 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4264 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4265 @cindex load address
4266 @cindex section load address
4267 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4268 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4269 an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4270 Address}).
4271
4272 The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4273 the load address of the section.
4274
4275 Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4276 specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4277 Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4278 linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
4279
4280 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4281 section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4282 VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4283 section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4284 or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4285 to the VMA.
4286 @xref{Output Section Region}.
4287
4288 @cindex ROM initialized data
4289 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4290 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4291 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4292 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4293 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4294 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4295 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4296 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4297 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4298
4299 @smallexample
4300 @group
4301 SECTIONS
4302 @{
4303 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4304 .mdata 0x2000 :
4305 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4306 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4307 .bss 0x3000 :
4308 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4309 @}
4310 @end group
4311 @end smallexample
4312
4313 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4314 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4315 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4316 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4317 script.
4318
4319 @smallexample
4320 @group
4321 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4322 char *src = &_etext;
4323 char *dst = &_data;
4324
4325 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4326 while (dst < &_edata) @{
4327 *dst++ = *src++;
4328 @}
4329
4330 /* Zero bss */
4331 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4332 *dst = 0;
4333 @end group
4334 @end smallexample
4335
4336 @node Forced Output Alignment
4337 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4338 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4339 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4340 @cindex output section alignment
4341 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4342
4343 @node Forced Input Alignment
4344 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4345 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4346 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4347 @cindex input section alignment
4348 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4349 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4350 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4351
4352 @node Output Section Constraint
4353 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4354 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4355 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4356 @cindex constraints on output sections
4357 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4358 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4359 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4360 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4361
4362 @node Output Section Region
4363 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4364 @kindex >@var{region}
4365 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4366 @cindex memory regions and sections
4367 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4368 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4369
4370 Here is a simple example:
4371 @smallexample
4372 @group
4373 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4374 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4375 @end group
4376 @end smallexample
4377
4378 @node Output Section Phdr
4379 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4380 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4381 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4382 @cindex program headers and sections
4383 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4384 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4385 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4386 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4387 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4388 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4389
4390 Here is a simple example:
4391 @smallexample
4392 @group
4393 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4394 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4395 @end group
4396 @end smallexample
4397
4398 @node Output Section Fill
4399 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4400 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4401 @cindex section fill pattern
4402 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4403 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4404 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4405 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4406 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4407 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4408 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4409 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4410 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4411 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4412 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4413 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4414 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4415
4416 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4417 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4418
4419 Here is a simple example:
4420 @smallexample
4421 @group
4422 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4423 @end group
4424 @end smallexample
4425
4426 @node Overlay Description
4427 @subsection Overlay Description
4428 @kindex OVERLAY
4429 @cindex overlays
4430 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4431 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4432 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4433 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4434 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4435 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4436 than another.
4437
4438 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4439 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4440 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4441 command is as follows:
4442 @smallexample
4443 @group
4444 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4445 @{
4446 @var{secname1}
4447 @{
4448 @var{output-section-command}
4449 @var{output-section-command}
4450 @dots{}
4451 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4452 @var{secname2}
4453 @{
4454 @var{output-section-command}
4455 @var{output-section-command}
4456 @dots{}
4457 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4458 @dots{}
4459 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4460 @end group
4461 @end smallexample
4462
4463 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4464 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4465 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4466 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4467 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4468 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4469
4470 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4471 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4472 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4473 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4474 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4475 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4476
4477 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4478 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4479 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4480 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4481 NOCROSSREFS}.
4482
4483 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4484 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4485 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4486 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4487 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4488 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4489 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4490
4491 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4492 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4493
4494 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4495 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4496 @smallexample
4497 @group
4498 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4499 @{
4500 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4501 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4502 @}
4503 @end group
4504 @end smallexample
4505 @noindent
4506 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4507 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4508 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4509 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4510 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4511 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4512
4513 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4514 like the following.
4515
4516 @smallexample
4517 @group
4518 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4519 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4520 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4521 @end group
4522 @end smallexample
4523
4524 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4525 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4526 example could have been written identically as follows.
4527
4528 @smallexample
4529 @group
4530 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4531 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4532 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4533 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4534 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4535 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4536 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4537 @end group
4538 @end smallexample
4539
4540 @node MEMORY
4541 @section MEMORY Command
4542 @kindex MEMORY
4543 @cindex memory regions
4544 @cindex regions of memory
4545 @cindex allocating memory
4546 @cindex discontinuous memory
4547 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4548 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4549
4550 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4551 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4552 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4553 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4554 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4555 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4556 around to fit into the available regions.
4557
4558 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4559 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4560 you wish. The syntax is:
4561 @smallexample
4562 @group
4563 MEMORY
4564 @{
4565 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4566 @dots{}
4567 @}
4568 @end group
4569 @end smallexample
4570
4571 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4572 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4573 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4574 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4575 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4576 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4577 command.
4578
4579 @cindex memory region attributes
4580 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4581 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4582 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4583 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4584 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4585 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4586 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4587
4588 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4589 @table @samp
4590 @item R
4591 Read-only section
4592 @item W
4593 Read/write section
4594 @item X
4595 Executable section
4596 @item A
4597 Allocatable section
4598 @item I
4599 Initialized section
4600 @item L
4601 Same as @samp{I}
4602 @item !
4603 Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4604 @end table
4605
4606 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4607 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4608 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4609 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4610 attributes.
4611
4612 @kindex ORIGIN =
4613 @kindex o =
4614 @kindex org =
4615 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4616 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4617 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4618 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4619 @code{ORG}).
4620
4621 @kindex LENGTH =
4622 @kindex len =
4623 @kindex l =
4624 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4625 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4626 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4627 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4628
4629 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4630 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4631 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4632 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4633 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4634 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4635 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4636 region.
4637
4638 @smallexample
4639 @group
4640 MEMORY
4641 @{
4642 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4643 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4644 @}
4645 @end group
4646 @end smallexample
4647
4648 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4649 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4650 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4651 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4652 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4653 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4654 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4655 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4656 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4657
4658 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4659 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4660 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4661
4662 @smallexample
4663 @group
4664 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4665 @end group
4666 @end smallexample
4667
4668 @node PHDRS
4669 @section PHDRS Command
4670 @kindex PHDRS
4671 @cindex program headers
4672 @cindex ELF program headers
4673 @cindex program segments
4674 @cindex segments, ELF
4675 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4676 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4677 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4678 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4679
4680 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4681 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4682 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4683 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4684 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4685
4686 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4687 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4688 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4689 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4690 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4691
4692 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4693 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4694 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4695
4696 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4697 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4698
4699 @smallexample
4700 @group
4701 PHDRS
4702 @{
4703 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4704 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4705 @}
4706 @end group
4707 @end smallexample
4708
4709 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4710 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4711 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4712 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4713 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4714 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4715
4716 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4717 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4718 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4719 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4720 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4721 Section Phdr}.
4722
4723 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4724 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4725 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4726 contain the section.
4727
4728 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4729 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4730 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4731 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4732 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4733 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4734 segment at all.
4735
4736 @kindex FILEHDR
4737 @kindex PHDRS
4738 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
4739 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4740 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4741 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4742 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4743 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), it must be the first loadable segment.
4744
4745 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4746 value of the keyword.
4747
4748 @table @asis
4749 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4750 Indicates an unused program header.
4751
4752 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4753 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4754 the file.
4755
4756 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4757 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4758
4759 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4760 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4761 found.
4762
4763 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4764 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4765
4766 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4767 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4768 ABI.
4769
4770 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4771 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4772
4773 @item @var{expression}
4774 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4775 be used for types not defined above.
4776 @end table
4777
4778 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4779 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4780 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4781 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4782 output section attribute.
4783
4784 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4785 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4786 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4787 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4788 header.
4789
4790 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4791 headers used on a native ELF system.
4792
4793 @example
4794 @group
4795 PHDRS
4796 @{
4797 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4798 interp PT_INTERP ;
4799 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4800 data PT_LOAD ;
4801 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4802 @}
4803
4804 SECTIONS
4805 @{
4806 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4807 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4808 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4809 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4810 @dots{}
4811 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4812 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4813 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4814 @dots{}
4815 @}
4816 @end group
4817 @end example
4818
4819 @node VERSION
4820 @section VERSION Command
4821 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4822 @cindex symbol versions
4823 @cindex version script
4824 @cindex versions of symbols
4825 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4826 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4827 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4828 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4829 shared library.
4830
4831 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4832 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4833 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4834
4835 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4836 @smallexample
4837 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4838 @end smallexample
4839
4840 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4841 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4842 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4843 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4844 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4845 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4846 library.
4847
4848 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4849 examples.
4850
4851 @smallexample
4852 VERS_1.1 @{
4853 global:
4854 foo1;
4855 local:
4856 old*;
4857 original*;
4858 new*;
4859 @};
4860
4861 VERS_1.2 @{
4862 foo2;
4863 @} VERS_1.1;
4864
4865 VERS_2.0 @{
4866 bar1; bar2;
4867 extern "C++" @{
4868 ns::*;
4869 "int f(int, double)";
4870 @}
4871 @} VERS_1.2;
4872 @end smallexample
4873
4874 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4875 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4876 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4877 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
4878 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4879 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4880 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4881 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
4882 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4883 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4884
4885 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4886 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4887 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4888
4889 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4890 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4891 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4892
4893 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4894 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4895 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
4896 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
4897 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4898 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4899 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4900 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4901 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4902
4903 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4904 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4905 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4906 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4907
4908 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
4909 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4910 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4911 won't.
4912
4913 @smallexample
4914 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
4915 @end smallexample
4916
4917 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4918 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4919 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4920 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4921 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4922 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4923 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4924 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4925 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4926 search for each symbol reference.
4927
4928 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4929 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4930 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4931 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4932 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4933 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4934 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4935 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4936 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4937
4938 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4939 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4940 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4941 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4942 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4943 @smallexample
4944 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4945 @end smallexample
4946 @noindent
4947 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4948 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4949 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
4950 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4951 takes precedence over a version script.
4952
4953 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4954 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4955 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4956 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4957 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4958
4959 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4960 source file. Here is an example:
4961
4962 @smallexample
4963 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4964 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4965 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4966 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4967 @end smallexample
4968
4969 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4970 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4971 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4972 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4973
4974 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4975 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4976 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4977 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4978 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4979 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4980
4981 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4982 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
4983 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
4984 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4985
4986 You can also specify the language in the version script:
4987
4988 @smallexample
4989 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4990 @end smallexample
4991
4992 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
4993 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4994 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4995 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4996
4997 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4998 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4999 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5000 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5001 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5002 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5003 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5004 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5005 expect when you upgrade.
5006
5007 @node Expressions
5008 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5009 @cindex expressions
5010 @cindex arithmetic
5011 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5012 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5013 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5014 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5015
5016 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5017
5018 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5019 expressions.
5020
5021 @menu
5022 * Constants:: Constants
5023 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5024 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5025 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5026 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5027 * Operators:: Operators
5028 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5029 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5030 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5031 @end menu
5032
5033 @node Constants
5034 @subsection Constants
5035 @cindex integer notation
5036 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5037 All constants are integers.
5038
5039 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5040 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5041 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5042 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5043 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5044 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5045
5046 @cindex scaled integers
5047 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5048 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5049 @cindex suffixes for integers
5050 @cindex integer suffixes
5051 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5052 constant by
5053 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5054 @ifnottex
5055 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5056 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5057 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5058 @end ifnottex
5059 @tex
5060 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5061 @end tex
5062 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5063 respectively. For example, the following
5064 all refer to the same quantity:
5065
5066 @smallexample
5067 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5068 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5069 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5070 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5071 @end smallexample
5072
5073 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5074 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5075
5076 @node Symbolic Constants
5077 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5078 @cindex symbolic constants
5079 @kindex CONSTANT
5080 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5081 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5082
5083 @table @code
5084 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5085 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5086 The target's maximum page size.
5087
5088 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5089 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5090 The target's default page size.
5091 @end table
5092
5093 So for example:
5094
5095 @smallexample
5096 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5097 @end smallexample
5098
5099 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5100 supported by the target.
5101
5102 @node Symbols
5103 @subsection Symbol Names
5104 @cindex symbol names
5105 @cindex names
5106 @cindex quoted symbol names
5107 @kindex "
5108 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5109 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5110 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5111 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5112 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5113 @smallexample
5114 "SECTION" = 9;
5115 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5116 @end smallexample
5117
5118 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5119 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5120 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5121
5122 @node Orphan Sections
5123 @subsection Orphan Sections
5124 @cindex orphan
5125 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5126 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5127 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5128 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5129 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5130 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5131 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5132 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5133 at the end of the file.
5134
5135 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5136 well as section flag.
5137
5138 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5139 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5140 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5141 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5142 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5143 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5144 character.
5145
5146 @node Location Counter
5147 @subsection The Location Counter
5148 @kindex .
5149 @cindex dot
5150 @cindex location counter
5151 @cindex current output location
5152 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5153 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5154 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5155 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5156 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5157
5158 @cindex holes
5159 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5160 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5161 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5162 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5163 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5164
5165 @smallexample
5166 SECTIONS
5167 @{
5168 output :
5169 @{
5170 file1(.text)
5171 . = . + 1000;
5172 file2(.text)
5173 . += 1000;
5174 file3(.text)
5175 @} = 0x12345678;
5176 @}
5177 @end smallexample
5178 @noindent
5179 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5180 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5181 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5182 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5183 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5184 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5185
5186 @cindex dot inside sections
5187 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5188 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5189 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5190 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5191 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5192 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5193
5194 @smallexample
5195 SECTIONS
5196 @{
5197 . = 0x100
5198 .text: @{
5199 *(.text)
5200 . = 0x200
5201 @}
5202 . = 0x500
5203 .data: @{
5204 *(.data)
5205 . += 0x600
5206 @}
5207 @}
5208 @end smallexample
5209
5210 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5211 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5212 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5213 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5214 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5215 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5216 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5217 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5218
5219 @cindex dot outside sections
5220 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5221 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5222 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5223
5224 @smallexample
5225 SECTIONS
5226 @{
5227 start_of_text = . ;
5228 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5229 end_of_text = . ;
5230
5231 start_of_data = . ;
5232 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5233 end_of_data = . ;
5234 @}
5235 @end smallexample
5236
5237 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5238 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5239 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5240 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5241 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5242 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5243 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5244 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5245 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5246 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5247 as follows:
5248
5249 @smallexample
5250 SECTIONS
5251 @{
5252 start_of_text = . ;
5253 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5254 end_of_text = . ;
5255
5256 start_of_data = . ;
5257 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5258 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5259 end_of_data = . ;
5260 @}
5261 @end smallexample
5262
5263 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5264 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5265 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5266 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5267 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5268 section. So you could write:
5269
5270 @smallexample
5271 SECTIONS
5272 @{
5273 start_of_text = . ;
5274 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5275 end_of_text = . ;
5276
5277 . = . ;
5278 start_of_data = . ;
5279 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5280 end_of_data = . ;
5281 @}
5282 @end smallexample
5283
5284 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5285 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5286
5287 @need 2000
5288 @node Operators
5289 @subsection Operators
5290 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5291 @cindex arithmetic operators
5292 @cindex precedence in expressions
5293 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5294 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5295 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5296 @ifnottex
5297 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5298 @smallexample
5299 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5300 (highest)
5301 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5302 2 left * / %
5303 3 left + -
5304 4 left >> <<
5305 5 left == != > < <= >=
5306 6 left &
5307 7 left |
5308 8 left &&
5309 9 left ||
5310 10 right ? :
5311 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5312 (lowest)
5313 @end smallexample
5314 Notes:
5315 (1) Prefix operators
5316 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5317 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5318 @end ifnottex
5319 @tex
5320 \vskip \baselineskip
5321 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5322 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5323 \hrule
5324 \halign
5325 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5326 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5327 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5328 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5329 \noalign{\hrule}
5330 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5331 &highest&&&&&\cr
5332 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5333 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5334 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5335 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5336 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5337 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5338 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5339 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5340 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5341 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5342 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5343 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5344 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5345 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5346 \hrule}
5347 @end tex
5348 @iftex
5349 {
5350 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5351 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5352 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5353 }
5354 @end iftex
5355 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5356
5357 @node Evaluation
5358 @subsection Evaluation
5359 @cindex lazy evaluation
5360 @cindex expression evaluation order
5361 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5362 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5363
5364 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5365 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5366 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5367 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5368
5369 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5370 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5371 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5372 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5373
5374 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5375 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5376 allocation.
5377
5378 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5379 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5380
5381 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5382 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5383 following
5384 @smallexample
5385 @group
5386 SECTIONS
5387 @{
5388 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5389 @{ *(.text) @}
5390 @}
5391 @end group
5392 @end smallexample
5393 @noindent
5394 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5395 address}.
5396
5397 @node Expression Section
5398 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5399 @cindex expression sections
5400 @cindex absolute expressions
5401 @cindex relative expressions
5402 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5403 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5404 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5405 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5406 or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5407 fixed offset from the base of a section.
5408
5409 The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5410 whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5411 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5412 section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5413
5414 A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5415 relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5416 further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5417 section will be the section of the relative expression.
5418
5419 A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5420 through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5421 will not have any particular associated section.
5422
5423 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5424 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5425 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5426 section @samp{.data}:
5427 @smallexample
5428 SECTIONS
5429 @{
5430 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5431 @}
5432 @end smallexample
5433 @noindent
5434 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5435 @samp{.data} section.
5436
5437 @node Builtin Functions
5438 @subsection Builtin Functions
5439 @cindex functions in expressions
5440 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5441 use in linker script expressions.
5442
5443 @table @code
5444 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5445 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5446 @cindex expression, absolute
5447 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5448 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5449 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5450 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5451
5452 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5453 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5454 @cindex section address in expression
5455 Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5456 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5457 the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5458 identical values:
5459 @smallexample
5460 @group
5461 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5462 .output1 :
5463 @{
5464 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5465 @dots{}
5466 @}
5467 .output :
5468 @{
5469 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5470 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5471 @}
5472 @dots{} @}
5473 @end group
5474 @end smallexample
5475
5476 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5477 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5478 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5479 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5480 @cindex round up location counter
5481 @cindex align location counter
5482 @cindex round up expression
5483 @cindex align expression
5484 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5485 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5486 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5487 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5488 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5489 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5490
5491 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5492 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5493 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5494 input sections:
5495 @smallexample
5496 @group
5497 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5498 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5499 *(.data)
5500 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5501 @}
5502 @dots{} @}
5503 @end group
5504 @end smallexample
5505 @noindent
5506 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5507 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5508 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5509 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5510
5511 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5512
5513 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5514 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5515 @cindex section alignment
5516 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5517 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5518 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5519 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5520 value in that section.
5521 @smallexample
5522 @group
5523 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5524 .output @{
5525 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5526 @dots{}
5527 @}
5528 @dots{} @}
5529 @end group
5530 @end smallexample
5531
5532 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5533 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5534 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5535 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5536 section.
5537
5538 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5539 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5540 This is equivalent to either
5541 @smallexample
5542 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5543 @end smallexample
5544 or
5545 @smallexample
5546 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5547 @end smallexample
5548 @noindent
5549 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5550 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5551 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5552 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5553 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5554 bytes in the on-disk file.
5555
5556 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5557 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5558 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5559 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5560 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5561
5562 @noindent
5563 Example:
5564 @smallexample
5565 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5566 @end smallexample
5567
5568 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5569 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5570 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5571 evaluation purposes.
5572
5573 @smallexample
5574 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5575 @end smallexample
5576
5577 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5578 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5579 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5580 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5581 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5582 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5583 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5584 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5585 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5586 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5587
5588 @smallexample
5589 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5590 @end smallexample
5591
5592 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5593 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5594 @cindex symbol defaults
5595 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5596 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5597 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5598 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5599 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5600 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5601 existed, its value is preserved:
5602
5603 @smallexample
5604 @group
5605 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5606 .text : @{
5607 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5608 @dots{}
5609 @}
5610 @dots{}
5611 @}
5612 @end group
5613 @end smallexample
5614
5615 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5616 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5617 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5618
5619 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5620 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5621 @cindex section load address in expression
5622 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5623 the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5624 attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5625 Section LMA}).
5626
5627 @kindex MAX
5628 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5629 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5630
5631 @kindex MIN
5632 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5633 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5634
5635 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5636 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5637 @cindex unallocated address, next
5638 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5639 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5640 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5641 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5642
5643 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5644 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5645 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5646
5647 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5648 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5649 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5650 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5651 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5652 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5653 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5654 ``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5655 name.
5656
5657 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5658 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5659 @cindex section size
5660 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5661 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5662 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5663 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5664 @smallexample
5665 @group
5666 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5667 .output @{
5668 .start = . ;
5669 @dots{}
5670 .end = . ;
5671 @}
5672 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5673 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5674 @dots{} @}
5675 @end group
5676 @end smallexample
5677
5678 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5679 @itemx sizeof_headers
5680 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5681 @cindex header size
5682 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5683 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5684 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5685 choose, to facilitate paging.
5686
5687 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5688 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5689 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5690 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5691 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5692 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5693 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5694 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5695 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5696 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5697 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5698 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5699 @end table
5700
5701 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5702 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5703 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5704 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5705 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5706 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5707 linker will report an error.
5708
5709 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5710
5711 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5712 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5713 commands.
5714
5715 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5716 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5717 read. This can affect archive searching.
5718
5719 @ifset GENERIC
5720 @node Machine Dependent
5721 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5722
5723 @cindex machine dependencies
5724 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5725 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5726 functionality are not listed.
5727
5728 @menu
5729 @ifset H8300
5730 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5731 @end ifset
5732 @ifset I960
5733 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5734 @end ifset
5735 @ifset ARM
5736 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5737 @end ifset
5738 @ifset HPPA
5739 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5740 @end ifset
5741 @ifset M68K
5742 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5743 @end ifset
5744 @ifset MMIX
5745 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5746 @end ifset
5747 @ifset MSP430
5748 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5749 @end ifset
5750 @ifset M68HC11
5751 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5752 @end ifset
5753 @ifset POWERPC
5754 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5755 @end ifset
5756 @ifset POWERPC64
5757 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5758 @end ifset
5759 @ifset SPU
5760 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5761 @end ifset
5762 @ifset TICOFF
5763 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5764 @end ifset
5765 @ifset WIN32
5766 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5767 @end ifset
5768 @ifset XTENSA
5769 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5770 @end ifset
5771 @end menu
5772 @end ifset
5773
5774 @ifset H8300
5775 @ifclear GENERIC
5776 @raisesections
5777 @end ifclear
5778
5779 @node H8/300
5780 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5781
5782 @cindex H8/300 support
5783 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5784 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5785
5786 @table @emph
5787 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
5788 @item relaxing address modes
5789 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5790 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5791 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5792 respectively.
5793
5794 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5795 @item synthesizing instructions
5796 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5797 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5798 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5799 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5800 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5801 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5802 top page of memory).
5803
5804 @item bit manipulation instructions
5805 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
5806 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
5807 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5808 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5809 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
5810 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5811 the top page of memory).
5812
5813 @item system control instructions
5814 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
5815 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5816 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5817 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
5818 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5819 the top page of memory).
5820 @end table
5821
5822 @ifclear GENERIC
5823 @lowersections
5824 @end ifclear
5825 @end ifset
5826
5827 @ifclear GENERIC
5828 @ifset Renesas
5829 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
5830 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5831 @node Renesas
5832 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
5833
5834 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5835 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5836 options are required for these chips.
5837 @end ifset
5838 @end ifclear
5839
5840 @ifset I960
5841 @ifclear GENERIC
5842 @raisesections
5843 @end ifclear
5844
5845 @node i960
5846 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5847
5848 @cindex i960 support
5849
5850 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5851 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5852 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5853 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5854 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5855 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5856 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5857
5858 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5859 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5860 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5861 the names
5862
5863 @smallexample
5864 @group
5865 try
5866 libtry.a
5867 tryca
5868 libtryca.a
5869 @end group
5870 @end smallexample
5871
5872 @noindent
5873 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5874 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5875
5876 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5877 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5878 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5879 specifies a library.
5880
5881 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5882 @cindex relaxing on i960
5883 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5884 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5885 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5886 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5887 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5888 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5889 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5890 not itself call any subroutines).
5891
5892 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5893 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5894 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5895 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5896
5897 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5898
5899 @ifclear GENERIC
5900 @lowersections
5901 @end ifclear
5902 @end ifset
5903
5904 @ifset ARM
5905 @ifclear GENERIC
5906 @raisesections
5907 @end ifclear
5908
5909 @ifset M68HC11
5910 @ifclear GENERIC
5911 @raisesections
5912 @end ifclear
5913
5914 @node M68HC11/68HC12
5915 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5916
5917 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5918
5919 @subsection Linker Relaxation
5920
5921 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5922 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5923
5924 @table @emph
5925 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5926 @item relaxing address modes
5927 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5928 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5929 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5930 respectively.
5931
5932 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5933 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5934 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5935
5936 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
5937 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5938 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5939 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5940 @code{bset} instructions.
5941
5942 @end table
5943
5944 @subsection Trampoline Generation
5945
5946 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5947 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5948 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5949 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
5950 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
5951 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5952 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5953 point to the function trampoline.
5954
5955 @ifclear GENERIC
5956 @lowersections
5957 @end ifclear
5958 @end ifset
5959
5960 @node ARM
5961 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
5962
5963 @cindex ARM interworking support
5964 @kindex --support-old-code
5965 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
5966 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
5967 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5968 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5969 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5970 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5971 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5972 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5973 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5974 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5975
5976 @cindex thumb entry point
5977 @cindex entry point, thumb
5978 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5979 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5980 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5981 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5982 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5983 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5984
5985 @cindex PE import table prefixing
5986 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5987 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5988 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5989 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5990 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5991
5992 @cindex BE8
5993 @kindex --be8
5994 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5995 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5996 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5997
5998 @cindex TARGET1
5999 @kindex --target1-rel
6000 @kindex --target1-abs
6001 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6002 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6003 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6004 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6005
6006 @cindex TARGET2
6007 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6008 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6009 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6010 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6011 @table @samp
6012 @item rel
6013 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6014 @item abs
6015 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6016 @item got-rel
6017 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6018 @end table
6019
6020 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6021 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6022 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6023 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6024 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6025 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6026
6027 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6028 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6029 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6030
6031 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6032 relocations are ignored.
6033
6034 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6035 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6036 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6037 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6038
6039 @smallexample
6040 TST rM, #1
6041 MOVEQ PC, rM
6042 BX Rn
6043 @end smallexample
6044
6045 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6046 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6047 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6048
6049 @cindex USE_BLX
6050 @kindex --use-blx
6051 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6052 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6053 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6054 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6055 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6056
6057 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6058 specify it if you are using that target.
6059
6060 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6061 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6062 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6063 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6064 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6065 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6066 the support code can read the intended values.
6067
6068 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6069 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6070 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6071 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6072 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6073 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6074
6075 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6076 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6077 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6078 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6079 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6080 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6081
6082 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6083 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6084 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6085 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6086 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6087 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6088 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6089
6090 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6091 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6092 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6093 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6094 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6095 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6096 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6097 not be diagnosed.
6098
6099 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6100 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6101 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6102 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6103 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6104 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6105 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6106
6107 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6108 @kindex --pic-veneer
6109 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6110 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6111 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6112 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6113
6114 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6115 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6116 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6117 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6118 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6119 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6120 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6121 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6122 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6123 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6124 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6125 where they should be placed.
6126
6127 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6128 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6129 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6130 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6131 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6132 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6133 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6134 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6135 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6136 from the input sections.
6137
6138 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6139 @samp{N = +1}.
6140
6141 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6142 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6143 otherwise.
6144
6145 @ifclear GENERIC
6146 @lowersections
6147 @end ifclear
6148 @end ifset
6149
6150 @ifset HPPA
6151 @ifclear GENERIC
6152 @raisesections
6153 @end ifclear
6154
6155 @node HPPA ELF32
6156 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6157 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6158 @kindex --multi-subspace
6159 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6160 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6161 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6162 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6163 multiple sub-spaces.
6164
6165 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6166 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6167 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6168 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6169 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6170 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6171 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6172 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6173 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6174 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6175 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6176 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6177 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6178 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6179 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6180 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6181
6182 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6183 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6184 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6185 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6186
6187 @ifclear GENERIC
6188 @lowersections
6189 @end ifclear
6190 @end ifset
6191
6192 @ifset M68K
6193 @ifclear GENERIC
6194 @raisesections
6195 @end ifclear
6196
6197 @node M68K
6198 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6199
6200 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6201 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6202 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6203 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6204 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6205 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6206 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6207 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6208 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6209 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6210 support such GOTs.
6211 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6212 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6213 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6214 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6215
6216 @ifclear GENERIC
6217 @lowersections
6218 @end ifclear
6219 @end ifset
6220
6221 @ifset MMIX
6222 @ifclear GENERIC
6223 @raisesections
6224 @end ifclear
6225
6226 @node MMIX
6227 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6228 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6229 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6230 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6231 can translate between the two formats.
6232
6233 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6234 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6235 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6236 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6237 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6238 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6239 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6240 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6241
6242 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6243 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6244 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6245 of a section.
6246
6247 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6248 are left out from an mmo file.
6249
6250 @ifclear GENERIC
6251 @lowersections
6252 @end ifclear
6253 @end ifset
6254
6255 @ifset MSP430
6256 @ifclear GENERIC
6257 @raisesections
6258 @end ifclear
6259
6260 @node MSP430
6261 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6262 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6263 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6264 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6265
6266 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6267 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6268
6269 @table @code
6270 @item @samp{.vectors}
6271 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6272
6273 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6274 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6275 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6276
6277 @item @samp{.infomem}
6278 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6279 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6280
6281 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6282 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6283 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6284
6285 @item @samp{.noinit}
6286 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6287
6288 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6289 @end table
6290
6291 @ifclear GENERIC
6292 @lowersections
6293 @end ifclear
6294 @end ifset
6295
6296 @ifset POWERPC
6297 @ifclear GENERIC
6298 @raisesections
6299 @end ifclear
6300
6301 @node PowerPC ELF32
6302 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6303 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6304 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6305 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6306 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6307 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6308 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6309 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6310 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6311 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6312 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6313 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6314 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6315
6316 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6317 @table @option
6318 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6319 @kindex --bss-plt
6320 @item --bss-plt
6321 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6322 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6323 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6324 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6325 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6326 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6327 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6328 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6329
6330 @kindex --secure-plt
6331 @item --secure-plt
6332 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6333 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6334 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6335 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6336 style BSS PLT.
6337
6338 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6339 @kindex --sdata-got
6340 @item --sdata-got
6341 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6342 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6343 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6344 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6345 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6346 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6347 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6348 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6349 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6350 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6351 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6352 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6353
6354 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6355 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6356 @item --emit-stub-syms
6357 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6358 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6359
6360 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6361 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6362 @item --no-tls-optimize
6363 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6364 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6365 disable the optimization.
6366 @end table
6367
6368 @ifclear GENERIC
6369 @lowersections
6370 @end ifclear
6371 @end ifset
6372
6373 @ifset POWERPC64
6374 @ifclear GENERIC
6375 @raisesections
6376 @end ifclear
6377
6378 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6379 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6380
6381 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6382 @table @option
6383 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6384 @kindex --stub-group-size
6385 @item --stub-group-size
6386 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6387 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6388 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6389 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6390 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6391 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6392 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6393 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6394 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6395 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6396 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6397 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6398 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6399 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6400
6401 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6402 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6403 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6404 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6405
6406 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6407 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6408 @item --emit-stub-syms
6409 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6410 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6411
6412 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6413 @kindex --dotsyms
6414 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6415 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6416 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6417 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6418 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6419 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6420 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6421 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6422 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6423 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6424 feature.
6425
6426 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6427 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6428 @item --no-tls-optimize
6429 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6430 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6431 disable the optimization.
6432
6433 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6434 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6435 @item --no-opd-optimize
6436 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6437 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6438 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6439 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6440
6441 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6442 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6443 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6444 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6445 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6446 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6447 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6448
6449 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6450 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6451 @item --no-toc-optimize
6452 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6453 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6454 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6455 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6456 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6457 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6458 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6459 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6460 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6461 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6462 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6463 optimization.
6464
6465 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6466 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6467 @item --no-multi-toc
6468 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6469 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6470 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6471 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6472 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6473 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6474 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6475 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6476 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6477 @end table
6478
6479 @ifclear GENERIC
6480 @lowersections
6481 @end ifclear
6482 @end ifset
6483
6484 @ifset SPU
6485 @ifclear GENERIC
6486 @raisesections
6487 @end ifclear
6488
6489 @node SPU ELF
6490 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6491
6492 @cindex SPU ELF options
6493 @table @option
6494
6495 @cindex SPU plugins
6496 @kindex --plugin
6497 @item --plugin
6498 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6499
6500 @cindex SPU overlays
6501 @kindex --no-overlays
6502 @item --no-overlays
6503 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6504 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6505 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6506 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6507
6508 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6509 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6510 @item --emit-stub-syms
6511 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6512 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6513
6514 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6515 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6516 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6517 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6518 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6519 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6520
6521 @cindex SPU local store size
6522 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6523 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6524 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6525 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6526 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6527
6528 @cindex SPU
6529 @kindex --stack-analysis
6530 @item --stack-analysis
6531 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6532 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6533 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6534 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6535 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6536 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6537 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6538 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6539 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6540 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6541 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6542 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6543 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6544 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6545 and calls will be given.
6546
6547 @cindex SPU
6548 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6549 @item --emit-stack-syms
6550 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6551 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6552 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6553 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6554 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6555 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6556 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6557 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6558 @end table
6559
6560 @ifclear GENERIC
6561 @lowersections
6562 @end ifclear
6563 @end ifset
6564
6565 @ifset TICOFF
6566 @ifclear GENERIC
6567 @raisesections
6568 @end ifclear
6569
6570 @node TI COFF
6571 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6572 @cindex TI COFF versions
6573 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6574 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6575 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6576 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6577 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6578 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6579
6580 @ifclear GENERIC
6581 @lowersections
6582 @end ifclear
6583 @end ifset
6584
6585 @ifset WIN32
6586 @ifclear GENERIC
6587 @raisesections
6588 @end ifclear
6589
6590 @node WIN32
6591 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6592
6593 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6594 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6595 command line options mentioned here.
6596
6597 @table @emph
6598 @cindex import libraries
6599 @item import libraries
6600 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6601 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6602 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6603 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6604 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6605 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6606
6607 @item exporting DLL symbols
6608 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6609 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6610
6611 @table @emph
6612 @item using auto-export functionality
6613 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6614 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6615 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6616
6617 @itemize
6618 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6619 @item --exclude-symbols
6620 @item --exclude-libs
6621 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6622 @item --version-script
6623 @end itemize
6624
6625 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6626 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6627 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6628 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6629 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6630 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6631 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6632 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6633
6634 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6635 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6636 if either of the following are true:
6637
6638 @itemize
6639 @item A DEF file is used.
6640 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6641 @end itemize
6642
6643 @item using a DEF file
6644 @cindex using a DEF file
6645 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6646 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6647 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6648 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6649 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6650
6651 @example
6652 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6653 @end example
6654
6655 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6656 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6657
6658 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6659
6660 @example
6661 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6662
6663 EXPORTS
6664 foo
6665 bar
6666 _bar = bar
6667 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6668 var1 DATA
6669 @end example
6670
6671 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6672 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6673 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6674 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6675 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6676 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6677
6678 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6679 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6680 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6681
6682 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6683 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6684 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6685 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6686
6687 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6688 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6689 non-default base address for the image.
6690
6691 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6692 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6693 filename specified on the command line.
6694
6695 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6696
6697 @example
6698 EXPORTS
6699 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6700 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6701 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
6702 @end example
6703
6704 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6705 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6706 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6707 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6708 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6709 @samp{<integer>} alias.
6710
6711 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6712
6713 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6714 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6715 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6716 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6717 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6718
6719 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6720 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6721 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6722 @code{*_imp__foo}).
6723
6724 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6725 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6726 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6727 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6728 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6729 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6730 application will behave unexpectedly.
6731
6732 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6733 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6734 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6735 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6736 the DLL without an import library.
6737
6738 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6739 other DEF file statements
6740
6741 @cindex creating a DEF file
6742 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6743 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6744
6745 @item Using decorations
6746 @cindex Using decorations
6747 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6748 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6749 declared as:
6750
6751 @example
6752 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6753 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6754 @end example
6755
6756 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6757 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6758 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6759 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6760
6761 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6762 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
6763 instead:
6764
6765 @example
6766 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6767 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6768 @end example
6769
6770 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6771 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6772 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6773 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
6774 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6775 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6776 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6777 information.
6778 @end table
6779
6780 @cindex automatic data imports
6781 @item automatic data imports
6782 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6783 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6784 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6785 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6786 code to these platforms, especially for large
6787 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
6788 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6789 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6790 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6791 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6792 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6793 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6794 trigger the feature's use.
6795
6796 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
6797 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6798
6799 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
6800 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6801
6802 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6803 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6804 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
6805 below.
6806
6807 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
6808 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6809 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6810 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6811 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6812 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
6813 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
6814 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
6815 references.
6816
6817 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6818 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6819 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6820 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6821 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6822 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
6823 run without error on an older system.
6824
6825 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6826 enabled as needed.
6827
6828 @cindex direct linking to a dll
6829 @item direct linking to a dll
6830 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6831 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
6832 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
6833 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
6834 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6835 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6836 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
6837 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
6838 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
6839 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6840
6841 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
6842 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
6843 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
6844 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6845 select the dll instead of an import library.
6846
6847
6848 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6849 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
6850
6851 @example
6852 libxxx.dll.a
6853 xxx.dll.a
6854 libxxx.a
6855 xxx.lib
6856 cygxxx.dll (*)
6857 libxxx.dll
6858 xxx.dll
6859 @end example
6860
6861 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6862
6863 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6864 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6865 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6866 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
6867 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6868
6869 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6870 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
6871 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6872 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6873 could coexist on the same machine.
6874
6875 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6876 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
6877 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
6878
6879 @example
6880 bin/
6881 cygxxx.dll
6882 lib/
6883 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
6884 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
6885 @end example
6886
6887 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6888 done two ways:
6889
6890 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6891 @example
6892 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
6893 @end example
6894
6895 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6896 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6897 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6898 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6899
6900 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6901 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6902 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6903 making the app/dll.
6904
6905 @example
6906 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
6907 @end example
6908
6909 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6910
6911 @example
6912 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
6913 @end example
6914
6915 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6916 perfectly legal
6917
6918 @example
6919 bin/
6920 cygxxx-5.dll
6921 lib/
6922 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
6923 @end example
6924
6925 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
6926 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6927 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6928
6929 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
6930 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
6931
6932 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6933 work with auto-imported data.
6934
6935 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6936 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6937 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6938 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6939 possible to do this without an import lib.
6940
6941 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6942 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6943 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6944 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6945
6946 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
6947 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6948 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6949 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
6950 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6951 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6952 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
6953
6954 @item symbol aliasing
6955 @table @emph
6956 @item adding additional names
6957 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
6958 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6959 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6960 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
6961 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
6962
6963 @example
6964 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6965
6966 EXPORTS
6967 foo
6968 _foo = foo
6969 @end example
6970
6971 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6972
6973 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6974 source code using the "weak" attribute:
6975
6976 @example
6977 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
6978 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
6979 @end example
6980
6981 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6982 symbols.
6983
6984 @item renaming symbols
6985 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
6986 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
6987 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6988 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
6989 created). In the following example:
6990
6991 @example
6992 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6993
6994 EXPORTS
6995 _foo = foo
6996 @end example
6997
6998 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6999 @samp{_foo}.
7000 @end table
7001
7002 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7003 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7004 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7005 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7006 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7007 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7008 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7009 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7010 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7011 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7012 which is probably not what you wanted.
7013
7014 @cindex weak externals
7015 @item weak externals
7016 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7017 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7018 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7019 are three variants of weak externals:
7020 @itemize
7021 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7022 called lazy externals.
7023 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7024 This form is not presently implemented.
7025 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7026 implemented.
7027 @end itemize
7028 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7029 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7030 uses a default value.
7031
7032 @cindex aligned common symbols
7033 @item aligned common symbols
7034 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7035 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7036 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7037 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7038 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7039 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7040 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7041 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7042 @end table
7043
7044 @ifclear GENERIC
7045 @lowersections
7046 @end ifclear
7047 @end ifset
7048
7049 @ifset XTENSA
7050 @ifclear GENERIC
7051 @raisesections
7052 @end ifclear
7053
7054 @node Xtensa
7055 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7056
7057 @cindex Xtensa processors
7058 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7059 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7060 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7061 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7062 example, with the command:
7063
7064 @smallexample
7065 SECTIONS
7066 @{
7067 .text : @{
7068 *(.literal .text)
7069 @}
7070 @}
7071 @end smallexample
7072
7073 @noindent
7074 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7075 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7076 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7077 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7078 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7079 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7080 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7081
7082 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7083 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7084 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7085 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7086 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7087 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7088 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7089 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7090 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7091 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7092 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7093 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7094
7095 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7096 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7097 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7098 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7099 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7100 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7101 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7102 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7103 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7104 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7105 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7106 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7107 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7108 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7109
7110 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7111 control the linker:
7112
7113 @cindex Xtensa options
7114 @table @option
7115 @kindex --no-relax
7116 @item --no-relax
7117 Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7118 by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7119 relaxation.
7120
7121 @item --size-opt
7122 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7123 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7124 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7125 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7126 preserve the correctness of the code.
7127 @end table
7128
7129 @ifclear GENERIC
7130 @lowersections
7131 @end ifclear
7132 @end ifset
7133
7134 @ifclear SingleFormat
7135 @node BFD
7136 @chapter BFD
7137
7138 @cindex back end
7139 @cindex object file management
7140 @cindex object formats available
7141 @kindex objdump -i
7142 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7143 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7144 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7145 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7146 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7147 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7148 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7149 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7150 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7151
7152 @cindex BFD requirements
7153 @cindex requirements for BFD
7154 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7155 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7156 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7157 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7158 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7159 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7160 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7161
7162 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7163 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7164 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7165 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7166
7167 @menu
7168 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7169 @end menu
7170
7171 @node BFD outline
7172 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7173 @cindex opening object files
7174 @include bfdsumm.texi
7175 @end ifclear
7176
7177 @node Reporting Bugs
7178 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7179 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7180 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7181
7182 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7183
7184 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7185 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7186 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7187 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7188 @command{ld}.
7189
7190 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7191 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7192
7193 @menu
7194 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7195 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7196 @end menu
7197
7198 @node Bug Criteria
7199 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7200 @cindex bug criteria
7201
7202 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7203
7204 @itemize @bullet
7205 @cindex fatal signal
7206 @cindex linker crash
7207 @cindex crash of linker
7208 @item
7209 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7210 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7211
7212 @cindex error on valid input
7213 @item
7214 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7215
7216 @cindex invalid input
7217 @item
7218 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7219 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7220 object files are correct.
7221
7222 @item
7223 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7224 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7225 @end itemize
7226
7227 @node Bug Reporting
7228 @section How to Report Bugs
7229 @cindex bug reports
7230 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7231
7232 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7233 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7234 recommend you contact that organization first.
7235
7236 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7237 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7238 distribution.
7239
7240 @ifset BUGURL
7241 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7242 @value{BUGURL}.
7243 @end ifset
7244
7245 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7246 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7247 fact or leave it out, state it!
7248
7249 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7250 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7251 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7252 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7253 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7254 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7255 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7256 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7257 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7258 and the most helpful.
7259
7260 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7261 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7262 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7263
7264 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7265 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7266 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7267 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7268
7269 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7270
7271 @itemize @bullet
7272 @item
7273 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7274 the @samp{--version} argument.
7275
7276 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7277 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7278
7279 @item
7280 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7281 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7282
7283 @item
7284 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7285 version number.
7286
7287 @item
7288 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7289 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7290
7291 @item
7292 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7293 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7294 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7295 sufficient.
7296
7297 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7298 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7299
7300 @item
7301 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7302 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7303 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7304 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7305 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7306 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7307 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7308 attachments are best.
7309
7310 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7311 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7312 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7313 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7314 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7315
7316 @item
7317 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7318 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7319
7320 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7321 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7322 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7323 a chance to make a mistake.
7324
7325 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7326 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7327 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7328 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7329 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7330 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7331 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7332 any conclusion from our observations.
7333
7334 @item
7335 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7336 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7337 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7338 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7339 context, not by line number.
7340
7341 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7342 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7343 @end itemize
7344
7345 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7346
7347 @itemize @bullet
7348 @item
7349 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7350
7351 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7352 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7353 changes will not affect it.
7354
7355 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7356 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7357 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7358 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7359
7360 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7361 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7362 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7363 less time, and so on.
7364
7365 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7366 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7367
7368 @item
7369 A patch for the bug.
7370
7371 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7372 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7373 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7374 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7375
7376 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7377 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7378 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7379 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7380 fixed.
7381
7382 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7383 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7384 help us to understand.
7385
7386 @item
7387 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7388
7389 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7390 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7391 @end itemize
7392
7393 @node MRI
7394 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7395 @cindex MRI compatibility
7396 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7397 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7398 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7399 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7400 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7401 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7402 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7403
7404 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7405 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7406 features to make use of them.
7407
7408 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7409 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7410
7411 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7412 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7413 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7414 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7415 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7416
7417 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7418
7419 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7420 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7421 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7422
7423 @table @code
7424 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7425 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7426 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7427 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7428 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7429 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7430 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7431 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7432 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7433 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7434 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7435
7436 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7437 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7438 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7439 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7440
7441 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7442
7443 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7444 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7445 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7446 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7447
7448 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7449 @item BASE @var{expression}
7450 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7451 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7452
7453 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7454 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7455 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7456 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7457
7458 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7459 @item END
7460 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7461
7462 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7463 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7464 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7465 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7466
7467 @enumerate
7468 @item
7469 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7470
7471 @item
7472 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7473
7474 @item
7475 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7476 @samp{COFF}
7477 @end enumerate
7478
7479 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7480 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7481 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7482 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7483
7484 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7485 same line, with no change in its effect.
7486
7487 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7488 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7489 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7490 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7491 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7492 command line.
7493
7494 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7495 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7496 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7497 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7498 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7499
7500 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7501 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7502 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7503 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7504 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7505 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7506 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7507 file, in the order specified.
7508
7509 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7510 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7511 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7512 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7513 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7514 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7515
7516 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7517 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7518 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7519 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7520 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7521 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7522 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7523 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7524 @end table
7525
7526 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7527 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7528 @include fdl.texi
7529
7530 @node LD Index
7531 @unnumbered LD Index
7532
7533 @printindex cp
7534
7535 @tex
7536 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7537 % meantime:
7538 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7539 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7540 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7541 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7542 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7543 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7544 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7545 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7546 \page\colophon
7547 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7548 @end tex
7549
7550 @bye
This page took 0.175095 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.